Nokia 6265 User Manual
Nokia 6265 Userâ s Guide i 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -11 Fr iday, November 18 , 2005 11:54 AM
LEGAL INFORMATION Copyright é2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nokia 6265, Pop-Port, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned here in may be trademarks or trade names of their resp ective owners. Bluetooth wireless technology is a regist ered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. miniSD is a registered trademark of the SD Card Association. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 6265 product. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCI DENTAL, AN D CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED âÂÂAS IS.â EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARR ANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT L IMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOS E, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCU RACY AND REL IABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT . NOKIA RESERV ES THE R I G H T T O R E V I S E T H I S D O C U M E N T O R W I T H D R A W I T A T A N Y T I M E W I T H O U T P R I O R N O T I C E . EXPORT CONTR OLS This device may contai n comm odities, technology, or software subject to export laws and regulations from the U.S. and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. 9244299 Issue 1 ii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -10 Fr iday, November 18 , 2005 11:54 AM
Contents For your safety .............................. viii About your device .................... .............. ix Network Services ...................... ............... x Shared memory .............. ......................... xi Welcome .......................................... xi Getting help .... ...................... ................. xi Find your phone label ............... ....... xi Nokia support and contact information .................. ...................... xii 1. Phone at a glance ........................ 1 Keys and parts ...................... .................. 1 Standby mode ................. ........................ 2 Quick keys ........ ........................... ............. 2 Indicators and icons ..... ...................... .. 2 Phone menus .. ........................... ............. 3 Scroll method .............. ........................ 3 Main menu display .......... .................. 4 In-phone help.................... .................. 4 Security functions .... ........................... .. 4 Go to functions ......... ..................... ........ 5 Select options ............................. ........ 5 Organise functions................ ............. 5 2. Set up your phone .............. ......... 6 Antenna ............................ ...................... .. 6 Battery .... ..................... ........................... .. 6 Remove the back cover .................... 6 Remove the battery ......... .................. 7 UIM (CDMA SIM) card slot . ............. 7 Replace the battery ......................... .. 7 Replace the back cover .................... 7 Charge the battery........... .................. 7 MiniSD card................ ..................... ........ 8 Turn your phone on or off ...... ............. 8 Connect the headset .......................... .. 8 Make calls ..................... .......................... . 9 Using the keypad............... ................. 9 Use the save contact option ........... 9 Use the contact s list ........................ . 9 Use the last dialled number .......... 10 Make a conference call .................. 10 Answer calls ........................... ............... 10 Answer or silence an incoming call.... ..................... ...................... ......... 10 Adjust the earpiece volume .......... 10 Answer a call with the keypad locked ........ ........................... ............... 10 Use the loudspeaker .................... .... 11 Mute phone during call......... ......... 11 Options during a call ....................... 11 Keyguard ............ ........................... ......... 11 3. Text entry ................................... 13 Standard mode ................. .................... 13 Text (Abc) ............................ ............... 13 Numbers (123) ... ...................... ......... 13 Change language ............................. 13 Punctuation and special characters.................. ..................... .... 14 Predictive text mode ...... .................... 14 Activate and deactivate ................. 14 Enter text ....................... .................... 14 Change case and mode ...................... 15 Delete text .................... ..................... .... 15 4. Messaging ............................. ..... 16 Text messages .............. ......................... 16 Text message folders and options 16 Write and send text messages ..... 17 Use a template ................... ............... 18 Read and reply to t ext messages. 18 Choose a text message option ..... 18 Use custom folders . ......................... 19 Delete text messages ............. ......... 20 iii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -9 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
Text message setting s ........ ............ 20 Multimedia messages ........................ 21 Multimedia message folders and options ......................... ..................... .. 22 Write and send mult imedia messages ................ .......................... .. 22 Read and reply to multimedia messages ................ .......................... .. 23 Choose a multimedia message option ........................... ..................... .. 24 Delete multimedia messages...... .. 26 Multimedia message settings ...... 27 Distribution lists ................................ .. 28 Create distribution list s ................. 28 Add and remove contacts ............. 28 Use distribution lists ....................... 28 Voice messages ............................. ....... 29 Save voice mailbox number .......... 29 Call and set up y our voice mail ... 29 Listen to your voice mail ........ ....... 29 Automate voice mail .......... ............ 29 Minibrowser messages ...................... 30 5. Log .......................................... .... 31 View missed calls .... ..................... ....... 31 View received calls ........................... .. 31 View dialled numbers.................. ....... 31 Time of call ............................... ............ 32 Clear log lists ................. ....................... 32 Call duration ....... ........................... ....... 32 Duration of data or fax calls..... ....... 32 Duration of minibrowser calls .. ....... 33 6. Contacts ..................................... 34 View contacts ..................... .................. 34 Search contacts ....... .......................... .. 34 Add new contacts ........ ..................... .. 35 Save a name and number ............. 35 Save a number (only).......... ............ 35 Save a contact ........... ....................... 35 Insert dialling codes ................. ....... 35 Save multiple numbers .................. 36 Save other details ............ ................ 36 Change default number . ................ 36 Send business cards ................... ..... 36 Edit contacts ................... ..................... 37 Modify contact se ttings .... ................ 38 Set up caller groups ...... ..................... 38 Set up a caller group . ..................... 38 Modify a caller group ..................... 38 Set up voice tags...... ...................... ..... 38 Assign a voice tag ...................... ..... 39 Use a voice tag ...... ...................... ..... 39 Play back a voice tag ................. ..... 39 Modify a voice tag ..... ..................... 39 Delete a voice tag ...................... ..... 40 Set up speed dial ...................... ........... 40 Assign a key to speed dial .. ........... 40 Change speed dial numbers .... ..... 40 Delete speed dial numbers ............ 40 Display phone number ............ ........... 40 Delete contacts ......................... ........... 41 Delete individual contacts ............ 41 Delete all contacts ..................... ..... 41 7. Camera............ ............................ 42 Take a photo ......................... ................ 42 Use the self-timer .......................... ..... 43 Take a sequence of photos ............... 43 Record a video ................................ ..... 44 Camera options .............. ..................... 44 Modify camera settings .... ................ 45 Image quality ......... ...................... ..... 45 Image size .... ........................... ........... 45 Video clip quality ........................ ..... 45 Video clip length ......... ..................... 45 Camera sounds ...................... ........... 45 Default title . ...................... ................ 46 Image storage ................................... 46 Default mode ............................... ..... 46 iv 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -8 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
8. Gallery ......................... ............... 47 Open a folder ........................ ................ 47 Gallery options ..... ..................... ........... 48 9. Media .......... ................................ 49 Music player .................... ...................... 49 Play music tracks ............................. 49 Music player options ....... ................ 50 Radio . ........................... ..................... ...... 51 Play radio ...................... ...................... 51 Radio options .................................... 52 Voice recorder............ ..................... ...... 52 Record speech or sound ................. 52 Recording list .............................. ...... 53 Change the storage folder .. ........... 53 Equaliser ...... ........................... ................ 53 Activate an equaliser set .... ........... 53 Create a custom equaliser set ...... 53 10. Settings .................................... 55 Profiles .............................. ...................... 55 Activate a profile.............. ................ 55 Personalise a profile .................. ...... 55 Set a timed profile ................ ........... 55 Display .............................. ...................... 56 Standby mode settings ........ ........... 56 Banner ...... ..................... ...................... 56 Screen saver................. ...................... 56 Sleep mode ............................. ........... 57 Backlight ti me-out .......................... 57 Themes .............. ........................... ........... 57 Tones ....... ..................... ........................... 57 Time and date ....... .......................... ...... 58 Clock .............. ........................... ........... 58 Date...... .......................... ...................... 58 Set the auto-update of date and time ........................... ........................... 59 Call ................ ........................... ................ 59 Anykey answer ............................ ...... 59 Automatic redial......... ...................... 59 Speed dial ................................ ........... 59 Answer when slide opened...... ...... 60 End call when slide closed ............ 60 Calling card ......................... ............... 60 International prefix ..................... .... 61 Data and fax calls ........ .................... 61 Call summary ..... ...................... ......... 62 Show call time on display ............. 62 Ringing tone for no caller ID ........ 62 Phone ............ ........................... ............... 62 Language settings ........ .................... 62 Automatic keyguard .... .................... 62 Navigation key ................... ............... 62 Memory status ... ...................... ......... 63 Security keyguard ............................ 63 DTMF tones ......... ...................... ......... 63 Start-up tone ..................... ............... 64 Help text activation ........................ 64 Voice commands ................... ............... 64 Add a voice tag .................. ............... 64 Activate a voice command ............ 65 Voice command options................. 65 Connectivity ........... ...................... ......... 65 Bluetooth connectivit y ................... 65 Infrared connectivity... .................... 68 Data cable transfer ................. ......... 69 Data and fax transfer....... ............... 70 Enhancement settings.... .................... 70 Headset ........................... .................... 71 Handsfree .................. ......................... 71 Loopset ...... ...................... .................... 71 Charger ........... ..................... ............... 71 Hearing aid ......... ........................... .... 71 Security ........ ...................... .................... 72 Phone lock...... ........................... ......... 72 Allowed number if lock active...... 72 Change lock code ......................... .... 73 Call restrictions ....................... ......... 74 Voice privacy ...... ........................... .... 74 Application settings ........................ .... 74 Network .............. ..................... ............... 75 Roaming options ..................... ......... 75 Mode.......... ...................... .................... 75 v 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -7 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
Network services ............................... .. 75 Store a feature code ....................... 75 Restore factory settings .................. .. 76 Phone details . ........................... ............ 76 11. Organiser .................................. 77 Alarm clock ......................... .................. 77 Set an alarm .......................... ............ 77 Repeat alarm......... ..................... ....... 77 Set the alarm tone .......................... 77 Set the snooze time-out.............. .. 78 Turn an alarm off ................. ............ 78 Calendar.......... ........................... ............ 78 Open calendar ...... .......................... .. 78 Calendar options ............ .................. 78 Make a calendar note .................. .. 79 View calendar notes (day view). .. 79 Options while viewing a day ........ 80 Send a calendar note.... .................. 80 Receive a note in calendar format (vCal) ................. ........................... ....... 80 Modify calendar settings ............... 80 Notes .................... ...................... ............ 81 Open notes ...... ........................... ....... 81 Make a note .......... .......................... .. 81 Send a note ........... ..................... ....... 82 Notes options ............ ....................... 82 To-do list ................... .......................... .. 82 Open to-do list ............................... .. 82 Make a to-do list note . .................. 82 Edit to-do list notes ...................... .. 83 View to-do list notes .................... .. 83 Send a to-do list note ........ ............ 83 To-do list options .......... .................. 84 Calculator .................. .......................... .. 84 Use calculator . ........................... ....... 84 Currency converter .............. ............ 85 Countdown timer .... .......................... .. 85 Set the normal timer .......... ............ 85 Change the timer ........... .................. 86 Stop the timer before the alarm sounds ............... ........................... ....... 86 Stopwatch ........................ ..................... 86 Measure split or lap time .............. 86 Save a time ................... ..................... 87 Stopwatch options .......................... 87 Operation note ............ ..................... 87 12. Mobile web .. ............................ 88 Mobile Internet access ...... ................ 88 Sign on to the mobile Internet ....... 89 Navigate the mobile Interne t .......... 89 Phone keys .................... ..................... 89 Receive a call while online ........... 89 Make an emer gency call while online ....... ........................... ................ 89 Clear the cache and disconnect .. 90 13. Extras............................. ........... 91 Games..................... ..................... ........... 91 Select games ..... ........................... ..... 91 Memory status ............ ..................... 91 Collection ........ ...................... ................ 91 Select application ............ ................ 91 Memory status ............ ..................... 91 14. PC connectivity ........................ 92 PC data transfer ............. ..................... 92 Nokia PC Suite .......................... ........... 92 15. Enhancements ............... ........... 93 16. Reference information .......... .. 95 Batteries and chargers ...................... 95 Nokia battery authentication guidelines .............................. ................ 96 17. Care and maintenance . ........... 98 vi 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -6 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
18. Additional safety information 99 Operating environment ....................... 99 Medical devices .................... ................. 99 Vehicles .................. ..................... .......... 100 Potentially explosive environments ............................. .......... 100 Emergency calls ........ ..................... ..... 101 Certification information (SAR)...... 101 MANUFACTURER âÂÂS LIMITED WARRANTY ..... .............................. 103 Index ...... .................................. ..... 106 vii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -5 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complet e user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRA FT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use th e device at a refuelling point. Don' t use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Don't use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Don't touch the an tenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIE D SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water- resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back- up copies or keep a writt en record of all important information. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES W h e n c o n n e c t i n g t o a n y other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. viii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -4 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. â About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on t he CDMA 800 and 1900, an d AMPS 800 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the feat ures in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. When taking and using images or video clips, obey all laws and respect local customs as well as privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. â Network Services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider or network operator. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilise ne twork services. Your service provider may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limit ations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language- dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured. This configuration may include changes in menu names, menu order and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on T CP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as Mobi le web require network support for these technologies. ix 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -3 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
â Shared memory The following features in this device may share memory: Messagi ng , Contacts , Gallery , Organiser , and Extras . Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features sharing memory. For example, saving many photos to the Gallery may use all of the available memory. Your device may display a message that t he memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. So me of the features, such as Messaging and Contacts , may have a certain amount of memory specially allotted to them in addition to th e memory shared with other features. x 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -2 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
Wel c o me Congratulations on your purchase of the Nokia 6265 mobile phone. Your phone provides many functions which are practical for daily use, such as a hands-free loudspeaker, camera, MP3 player, video recorder, and more. Your phone can also connect to a PC, laptop, or other device using a USB data cable , Bluetooth wireless technology, or infrared. â Getting help Find your phone label If you need help, Nok ia Care Contact Centre is available for assistance. Before calling, we recommend that you write down the Electronic serial number (ESN) and have it available. The ESN is found on the type label, which is located beneath the battery on the back of the phone. See âÂÂRemove the back coverâÂÂ, p. 6 and âÂÂRemove the batteryâÂÂ, p. 7 for more information. xi 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -1 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
Nokia support and contact information For the latest version of this guide, downloads, services and additional information related to your Nokia product, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/support or your local Nokia w eb site. Should you still require assistance, please refer to www.nokia-asia.com/ contactus. To check for the nearest Noki a care center location for maintenance services, you may like to vis it www.nokia-asia.com/repair. xii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 0 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 1 1. Phone at a glance Ke ys and parts ⢠miniSD card slot (1) ⢠Earpiece (2) ⢠Display (3) ⢠Headset connector (4) â¢L E D i n d i c a t o r ( 5 ) ⢠Left selection key (6) ⢠Right selection key (7) ⢠Call key (8) ⢠End and power key (9) ⢠Infrared (10) ⢠Strap holder (11) ⢠Center selection and scroll key (12) ⢠Keypad (13) ⢠Microphone (14) ⢠Charger port (15) ⢠Pop-Port⢠connector (16) ⢠Camera key (17) ⢠Camera flash and self-portrait mirror (18) ⢠Loudspeaker (19) ⢠Volume key (20) 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 1 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 2 â Standby mode Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator and the model number of your phone , some or all of the following selection keys may appear in standby mode. The standby mode indicates your phone is idle. Signal strength (1)âÂÂMore bars indicate a stronger network signal. Menu (2)âÂÂPress the center selection key to select this option. Go to (3)âÂÂPress the left selection key to select this option. Names or network operator menu (4)â Press the right selection key to select this opt ion. Battery level (5)âÂÂA filled in battery indicates more power. â Quick keys Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator and the model number of your phone, some or all of the following scroll key shortcuts may be available in standby mode. In standby mode, the four-way scroll and center selection keys instantly take you to frequently-accessed menus: Scroll up keyâÂÂGo to the contacts list or network operator menu. Scroll right keyâÂÂView the calendar. Scroll down keyâÂÂGo to the contacts list. Scroll left keyâÂÂCreate a text message. Center selection keyâÂÂDisplays available applications or selects highlighted menus and submenus. â Indicators and icons Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator and the model number of your phone, some or all of the following indicators and icons may appear on standby mode. You have one or more text or picture messages. See âÂÂRead and reply to text messagesâÂÂ, p. 18. You have one or more voice messages. See âÂÂVoice messagesâÂÂ, p. 29 Your phone keypad is locked. See âÂÂKeyguardâÂÂ, p. 11 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 2 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 3 Your phone is set to the silent profile. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂ, p. 55 The alarm clock is on. See âÂÂAlarm clockâÂÂ, p. 77 The countdown timer is ru nning. See âÂÂCountdown timerâÂÂ, p. 85 The stopwatch timing is running in the background. See âÂÂStopwatchâÂÂ, p. 86 Integrated hands free or loudspeaker is active. The timed profile is selected. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂ, p. 55 Phone can be connected to a Bluetooth wireless technology device. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 65 , , , , or An enhancement, such as headset, handsfree, hearing aid, TTY/TTD, or loopset is active or connected. See âÂÂEnhancement settingsâÂÂ, p. 70 or Voice privacy encryption is active or inactive i n the network. Phone is roaming outside of your home network. Phone is in a digital network. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix. Phone is in a 1XRTT network. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix. â Phone menus Phone features are grouped according to function and are acces sed through the main menus. E ach main menu contains submenus and lists from which you can select or view items and personalise your phone features. You can access these menus and submenus by using the scroll method or by using a sho rtcut. Note: Some features may not be available, depending on your network. For more information, contact your wireless provider. Scroll method 1. In standby mode, select Menu using the center selection key. Scroll through the main menu using the scroll key. On the right side of the screen, a scroll bar is displayed with a tab that moves up or down as you move through the menus. This provides a visual representation of your current position in the menu st ructure. 2. When you arrive at a menu, press Select (the center selection key) to enter submenus. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 3 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 4 Select Back from the submenu level to return to the previous menu. Press the end key to return to standby mode from any menu or submenu. Main menu display You can control whether your phon e main menu is displayed as a List , Grid or Grid with labels . By default, the main menu displays in Grid with labels format. In standby mode, select Menu > Options > Main menu view > List , Grid , or Grid with labels . If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, you can also change the order of menus in your main menu. In standby mode, select Menu > Options > Organise . Highlight a menu, select Move . Use the scroll key to move the menu to a new location, select OK . You can repeat this procedure to personalise your main menu. Select Don e > Yes to save the changes. In-phone help Many features have brief descriptions (help text) that can be viewed on the display. To view these descriptions, scroll to a feature, and wait for about 15 seconds. Scroll down to view all of the description, or select Back to exit. In order to view the descriptions, you must activate help text. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Help text activation > On or Off . â Security functions The security feature protects your device from unauthorised outgoing calls or denies access to the stored information with a lock or security code. The lock code is a four-digit number, while the security co de is a five-digit number. By default, the security feature uses the lock code (defaulted to the last four d igits of your phone number), instead of the security code to protect your phone. You must enter your loc k code to access the Security menu. To access the Security menu, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 72 for more information. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 4 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 5 Note: Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, the preset lock code may be 1234 or 0000 instead of the last four digits of your phone number. If none of these work, contact your wireless service provider or network operator for more help. To enter the lock code to restore the factory settings, d o the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Restore factory sett. 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . Note: Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, your phone may ask for the security code (defaulted to 12345) instead of the lock code. â Go to functions The Go to menu allows you to change the function of th e left selection key on your phone so that your most frequently used functions can be quickly accessed from the Go to menu in standby mode. Select options 1. In standby mode, select Go to > Options > Select options . 2. Scroll to the opt ions you want to add. 3. Select Mark to add an option or Unmark to remove an option. 4. Select Do ne when you have added all desired options. 5. Select Ye s to save the cha nges. 6. In standby mode, select Go to to display a list of the options that you selected in step 3. Organise functions In standby m ode, select Go to > Options > Organise . Highlight an option, and select Move . Scroll to move the option to a new location, and select OK . You can repeat this procedure to personalise your Go to menu. Select Do ne > Yes to save the changes. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 5 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Set up your phone 6 2. Set up your phone â Antenna Your device has an internal antenna. Hold the device as you would any other telephone with the a ntenna area pointed up and over your should er. Note: As with any other radio transmittin g device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the device is switch ed on. C ontact with the antenna affects cal l quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna area w hen operating the device optimises antenna performance and battery life. â Battery Always switch off the power and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Avoid touching electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the device with the covers attached. Prolonged, continuous use of yo ur device may increase the device temperature. T he increased temperature is a normal function of this product and does not pose a safety concern for you or th e device. If the temperatu re is uncomforta ble to you, use a headset or allow your device to return to room temperature before your next call. Remove the back cover 1. With the back of the phone facing you, press down and hold the back cover latch. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 6 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Set up your phon e 7 2. Slide th e back cover toward th e bottom of the phone, lift up and remove. Remove the battery After you have removed the back cover, insert your finger into the finger grip, and lift the battery from its compartmen t. UIM (CDMA SIM) card slot Your phone has a UI M card slot buil t into the mechanics. However, the UIM is not functional in this phone model. Avoid placing anything into the UIM card slot. Replace the battery 1. Insert the battery, gold-coloured contact end first, into the battery slot. 2. Push down on the other end of the battery to snap the battery in to place. Replace the back cover 1. Set the back cover on the phone with the cover tabs aligned with the slots in the phone. 2. Press the back cover latch down and slide the back cover toward the top of phone. 3. Make sure back cover latch is secure. Charge the battery 1. Plug the charger transformer into a standard ac outlet. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 7 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Set up your phone 8 2. Insert the charger output plug into the round jack at the bottom end of the phone. If necessary, you can use a CA-44 adapter cable (1) to connect a charger and the phone. After a few seconds, the battery indicator in the display scrolls. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. â MiniSD card To insert the miniSD, complet e the following steps. 1. Slide open the phone and lift open the miniSD slot cove r. 2. Insert card firmly as shown in the illustration. The card clicks into place . To remove the miniSD card, firmly press the card until it releases from the card slot and slides out. Important: Do not rem ove the memory card while reading or writing to the card. Doing s o may cause data corruption on the card or the phone. â T urn your phone on or off 1. To turn your phone on or off, press and hold the end key for at least 3 seconds. 2. Enter the lock code, if necessary, and select OK . â Connect the headset A compatible headset, such as HS-5, may be purchased with your phone or separately as an enhancement. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 8 Frid ay, November 18 , 2005 11:54 AM
Set up your phon e 9 See âÂÂEnhancement settingsâÂÂ, p. 70 for information. 1. Plug the headse t connector into the Pop-Port⢠connector at the bottom end of your phone. appears on the display. 2. Position the heads et on your ear. With the headset connected, you can make, answer, and end calls as usual. ⢠Use the keypad to enter numbers. ⢠Press the call key to place a call. ⢠Press the end ke y to end a cal l. You can also plu g a compatible headset, such as the HS-9 Universal Headset, into the 2.5 mm headset jack on the side of your phone to allow hands-free operation. See âÂÂEnhancement settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. â Make calls Using the keypad 1. Enter the phone number, and pres s the call key. To delete a character to the left of the cursor, select Clear . 2. To end the call, press the end key. To cancel th e call attempt , select End call. Use the save contact option 1. In standby mode, enter the phone number and select Save , enter a name for the contact, and select OK . 2. To make the call, press t he call key. To return to standby mode, select Done. Use the contacts list 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your contacts. 2. Scroll to the contact you wish to dial, press the call key. To view details of the entry, select Details . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 9 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Set up your phone 10 Use the last dialled number 1. In standby mode, press the call key to display the last 30 numbers dialle d. 2. Scroll to the number or name you wish to redial, and press the call key. Make a conference call This service is netw ork dependent. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. With the first participant on the line, select Optio ns > New call . 3. Enter the phone number of the second participant; or, t o retrieve a number from your contacts, select Search and the number you want to call. 4. Press the call key. The first participant is put on hold. 5. When the second participant picks up, press the 3 key and then the call key to connect the ca lls. 6. To end the conference call, select Options > End all calls , or press t he end key. â Answer calls Answer or silence an incoming call 1. To answer the call, press the call key or select Answer . 2. To reject the call, press the end key. Select S ilence to mute th e ringing tone. Select Dismis s or do nothing, and the call is eventually forwarded to voice mail. If your phone is set to Silent in the Profiles menu, select Dismiss , and the call is forwarde d to voice mail. Adjust the earpiece volume Press the up arrow or down arrow on the volume key located on the right side of your phone to adjust the volume of the earpiece. When adjusting the volume, a bar chart appears in the display indicating the volume level. Answer a call with the keypad locked To answer a call with th e keypad locked, simply press the call key. During the call, all features function as normal. When you end or reject the call, the keypad automatically relocks. See âÂÂKeyguardâÂÂ, p. 11 for details. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 10 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Set up your phon e 11 When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Use the loudspeaker Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use because the volume may be extremely loud. You can use your ph one loudspeaker during a call: ⢠To activate the loudspea ker, select Loudsp. ⢠To deactivate the loudspeaker, select Hands et . The loudspeaker is deact ivated automatically when a call or a call attempt ends or when cert ain enhancements are connected. Mute phone during call To mute your phone during a call, select Mu te ; to unmute the phone, select Unmute . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use during a call, are network services. Check with your wireless service provider or network operator for more information. During a call, select Options and one of the following: Loudspeaker or Handset âÂÂActivate or deactivate the louds peaker while in a call. New call âÂÂInitiate a conference call. See âÂÂMake a conference callâÂÂ, p. 10 for information. Save âÂÂSave a number entered during a call. Add to contact âÂÂAdd a number entered during a call to a contact in your list. End all calls âÂÂDisconnect from all active calls. DTM F t on e s âÂÂEnter the numbers, and select To n es to send the numbers as tones. Contacts âÂÂView the contacts list. Menu âÂÂView the phone menu. â K eyguard With keyguard, you can lock the keypad to prevent keys from being pressed accidentally. Remember to lock your phone keypad to prevent accidental calls. If th e keypad is locked, it unlocks when you receive a call. After the call, the lock automatically reactivates . When the keyguard is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 11 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Set up your phone 12 When the phone slide is open: ⢠To unlock the keypad, select Unlock , and press * within 2 seconds. ⢠To lock the keyp ad, select Menu , and press * within 2 seconds. When the phone slide is closed: ⢠To unlock the keypad, open the slide or select Unlock > OK . ⢠To lock the keyp ad, select Menu , and press * within 2 seconds. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 12 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Text entry 13 3. T ext entry You can use two methods for entering text and numbers: standard mode and predictive text mode. â Standard mode Standard mode is the only way to enter text in to the cont acts list, and to rename ca ller gr oups. Text (Abc) ⢠Press a key once to insert the first letter on the key, twice for the second letter, etc. If you pause briefly, the last letter in the display is accepted and your phone awaits the next entry. ⢠Press 0 to enter a space, thereby accepting a completed word. ⢠Press 1 as many times as n ecessary to scroll through a list of commonly used characters. ⢠Press * to display a complete list of special characters. ⢠Press and hold # to ope n Editor settings > Number mode , Dictionary on or Dictionary off , or Writing language . Numbers (123) T o s w i t c h t o 1 2 3 m o d e f r o m A b c m o d e , press and hold # at any message entry screen to bring up the E ditor settings menu list of Number mode , Dictionary on or Dictionary off , and Writing language . Select Number mode , and the device returns to th e message entry screen and switches the ABC icon in the upper left corner of the display to the 123 icon (or back). To return to Abc mode, press and hold #. Change language To change the language, do the following: 1. Press and hold #. 2. At the Editor settings menu l ist, select Writ ing language , and the new language. The phone will return to t he message entry screen, and you can compose in the new language. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 13 Fr iday, November 18, 20 05 11:54 AM
Text entry 14 Punctuation and special characters While at any text entry screen, press * to display special characte rs (press and hold * if predictive text is on). Press * again to cycle through all avai lable characters. Scroll to na vigate through the list of special characters . Once a character is highlighted, select Use to insert the character into your mess age. â Predictive text mode Predictive text input allows you to write messages q uickly using your keypad and the built-in dictionary. It is m u c h f a s t e r t h a n the standard mode method, because for each lette r, you only press the corresponding key on your keypad once. Activate and deactivate At any text entry sc reen, select and hold Options to turn predict ive text on or off depending on previous mode; or, select Opti ons > Dictionary on or Dictionary off . Press # twice to change from predictive text mode to standard mode and back. Enter text The illustration below simulates your display each time a key is pressed. For example, to write Nokia with predictive text on and with the English dictionary selected, press each of the following keys once: ⢠Press 0 to enter a space and begin writing the next word. ⢠If a displayed word is not correct, press * to see other matches. To return to the previous word in the list of matches, select Previous . ⢠If ? appears after a word, it is not in the dictionary. Select Spell to add the word to the dictionary. ⢠Press 1 to insert a period into your message. ⢠Press and hold * to display special characters. Press * again to cycle through all available characters. ⢠Press and hold the specific number key to enter a number. ⢠Press and hold # to bri ng up the Editor settings menu list of Number mode , Dictionary on or Dictionary off , and Writing language . 66 5 42 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 14 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Text entry 15 â Change case and mode Press # to switch between uppercase, lowercase, and sentence case, as well as standard and predictive text modes. Case and mode are indicated by the following icons that appear in the upper centre of the display screen. Uppercase text: standard mode is on. Lowercase text: standard mode is on. Sentence case text: standard mode is on. Only available at the beginning of a sentence. Uppercase text: predictive text is on. Lowercase text: predictive text is on. Sentence case text: predictive text is on . Only available at the beginning of a sentence. â Delete text To delete text, use one of the following options: ⢠Select Clear to backs pace the cursor and delete a character. ⢠Select and hold Clear to backspace continuously and delete characters. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 15 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 16 4. Messaging Your phone is capable of creating and receiving text, multimedia, voice and minibrowser messages. Check with your service provider to s ee what messaging is available for you. â T e xt messages Text messaging is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can send and receive text messages to compati ble phones that are also subscribed to the service. When composing text messages, check the number of ch aracters allowed in the top right co rner of the message . Using special (unicod e) characters takes up more s pace. If there are special characters in your message, the indicator may not show the message length correct ly. Before the message is sent, the phone will tell you if the message exceeds the maximum length allowed for one message. Also, you can make dist ribution l ists that c ontain phone numbers and names from your contact list. See âÂÂDistribution listsâÂÂ, p. 28 for more information. Note: When sending messages, your device may display Message sent . This is an indication tha t the message has been sent by your device to the network. Thi s is not an indication tha t the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. Text message folders and options In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages and from the following: Create message âÂÂCreate and send messages. Inbox âÂÂCheck for received text messages. Text messages are automatically stored in the Inbox when they are received. A notification appears when a message arrives in the Inbox . Outbox âÂÂCheck for outgoing text messages. Text messages are automatically stored in the Outbox as they are sent. If your service is interrupted while send ing, the text 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 16 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 17 message is stored in the Outbox until another delivery atte mpt is made. Sent items âÂÂSent text messages are stored in Sent items . Drafts âÂÂSave incomplete text me ssages in a draft. Store drafts of text messages in Drafts to be completed at a later time. Archive âÂÂSave text messages in Archive . Tem pl ate s âÂÂSelect from a collection of prewritten Te mp l at e s , when creat ing text messages. Preload ed Tem pl at es can be edited and personalised. My folders âÂÂCreate and name personal folders. Delete messages âÂÂDele te messages from a selected folder or all folders. Message settings âÂÂChange settings for reading, writing, and sending text messages. Send numeric page âÂÂSend a numeric page. Add - in s âÂÂAdd a sound, animation, or picture object. Styles âÂÂChange font appearance and size, and text alignment. Write and send text messages 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Create message . To go quickly to the Create message screen, scroll left in standby mode. 2. Compose a text message using the keypad. See âÂÂChoose a text message option âÂÂ, p. 18 for composing options. 3. Select Send to > Recently us ed , Send to number , Send to e-mail , Send to many , or Send to distribution list (if you have created one). 4. Select a number or distribution list, enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address, or se lect Search to retrieve a number or e-mail address from your contacts list; select Send . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 17 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 18 Use a template Templates are short, prewritten messages that can be retrieved and inserted into new text message s. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Create message > Options > Use template . 2. Select one of the available templates and complete the text message using the keypad. Read and reply to text messages When you receive a text message, a notification appears and the unopened letter icon ( ) is displ ayed. 1. Select Show to read the text message or Exit to dismiss the notification . Scroll to view the whole message, if necessary. When unopened messages are in your inbox, is shown in the upper centre of the display screen during standby mode as a reminder. 2. Select Reply > Empty screen , Original text , Te m pla t e , or one of the predefined answers pro vided. 3. Compose your reply with the keypad, and select Send . Choose a text message option Create message options When you create or reply to a text message, depending on the mode of text input you are using and the features supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, some or all of the following are availab le: Sending options â Mark or Unmark a message as Urgent , Delivery reports , Callback number , or Signature . Clear text âÂÂErase all text from your message. Insert contact âÂÂInsert detail from your contacts list into your messag e. Insert number âÂÂInsert a phone number or find a phone number i n the contacts list. Save âÂÂSave the message in Drafts . Exit editor âÂÂExit the message editor. Use template âÂÂInsert a predefined template . Insert smiley âÂÂInsert a smiley. Insert word or Edit word âÂÂEnter or edit the text of a ne w word that might no t appear in the predictive text dictionary. This displays only when predictive text is on. Insert symbol âÂÂInsert a special character. This displays only when predictive text is on. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 18 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 19 Writing language âÂÂTo change the language from a pre-defined list. Dictionary on or Dictionary off âÂÂTurn predictive text on or off. Matches âÂÂView matches found in the predictive text dictionary for the word you want to use. This displays only when predictive text is on. Read message optio ns When you read a text message, the following options are available: Delete âÂÂDiscard the text message. Use detail > Number , E-mail address , or Web address âÂÂSelect Save to create a new contact; select Options > A dd to contact , Send message , or Call for other options. Move âÂÂSave the message to Archive , Tem pl ate s , or a folder you have created. Divert âÂÂForward the text message to another phone number. Lock or Unlock âÂÂLock or unlock the text message. The appropriate option appears. Rename â Edit the title of the text message. Use custom folders Your phone has a folder system that saves and stores text messages. Additionally you can create custom folders. Create a custom folder To organise your messages, create custom folders, and save message s you want to keep there. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > My folders > A dd fldr . to create your initial custom folder. Select Menu > Mes saging > Te x t messages > My folders > Options > Add folder to create an additional custom folde r. 2. Enter a name for the new folder, and select OK . Rename a custom folder 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > My folders . 2. Folders you have created a ppear in the display. Scroll to the folde r you wish to rename, and select Options > Rename folder . 3. Select and hold Clear to delete the existing entry; enter a new name for the folder; select OK to confirm or Back to ex it. Delete a custom folder Only folders in My folders can be deleted. The Inbox , Outbox , Sent it ems , Drafts , Archive , and Tem pl at es folders are protected. When you delete a folder, all messages in the folder are also deleted. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 19 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 20 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > My folders . 2. Scroll to the folder you wish to delete, and select Options > Delet e folder . 3. Select Ye s to delete or No to exit. Delete text messages If your message memory is full and you have more text messages waiting at the network, blinks in standby mode. You can do the following: ⢠Read some of the unread text messages, and delete them. ⢠Delete text messages from some of your folders. Delete a single text message To delete a sing le text messag e, you need t o open it first . 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages . 2. Select the folder containing the text message you wish t o delete. 3. Select the message you wish to delete and Options > Delete . 4. Select Ye s to delete the message or No to exit. Delete all messages in a folder 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Delete messages and one of the following: All âÂÂDeletes all text mes sages in the folder. All read âÂÂDeletes only the read text messages in the folder. All unread âÂÂDeletes all unread text messages in the Inbox . 2. If you select All or All read , select Mark or Unmark to choose the folders from which to delete text messages. Select Options > Mark all to choose all folders. 3. Select Done after choosing the folders. 4. Select Ye s to delete the mes sage or No to exit. Text message settings Sending options In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Message settings > Sending options and the s etting you wish to chang e: Priority > Normal or Urgent âÂÂSelect the priority of the message. Delivery reports âÂÂSelect On to receive a note confirming delivery of a text message. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 20 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 21 Send callback number âÂÂSelect OK to send your default phone to the recipient. Signature âÂÂSelect On to append a signature to an outgoing text message. If you have not created a signature, select On ; enter a signature, and select OK . Other settings In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Message settings > Other settings and the setting you wish to change: Message font size âÂÂSelect the desired font size for the display. Message overwriting > Sent items only , Inbox only , Sent items & Inbo x , or Off â Set your phone to automatically replace old messages in Inbox or Sent items when new one s arrive. When the message memory is full, your phone cannot send or receive any n ew messages. Save sent messages âÂÂSelect Always save or Always prompt to save sent text messag es to Sent items . Select Off to not save messages. Queue msgs. if no digital âÂÂSelect On or On prompt to store te xt messages in the Out box until they can be sent with a digital service. Select Off to no t store messages. â Multimedia messages Multimedia messaging is a net work service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operato r supports this feature, you can send and receive multimedia messages to compatible phones that are also subscribed to the service. A multimedia message can contain text, sound, a picture , or a video clip. Your phone supports multimedia messages that are up to 600 KB . If the maximum size is exceeded, the phone may not be able to receive the message. Note: Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. Depending upon your network, y ou may receive a mes sage that includes an Internet address where you can go to view the multimedia message. Pictures are scaled to fit the display area of the phone. Your phone has a multimedia message viewer for playing messages and a multimedia inbox for storing saved messages. Once you save the multimedia message, you can use the image as a screen saver or the sound as a ringing ton e. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 21 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 22 Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Multimedia messaging only s upports the following formats: ⢠Picture: JPEG, GIF, animat ed GIF, WBMP, BMP, and PNG ⢠Sound: MP3, eAAC , SP-MIDI, AMR audio, QCELP, and monophonic ringing tones ⢠Video: clips in H.264 format w ith QCIF image size You cannot receive multimedia messages if you have a call in progress, games or other applications running, or an active browsing session. Because delivery of multimedia messages can fail for a variety of reasons, do not rely solely upon them for essential communications. Multimedia message folders and options In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs . and from the following: Create message âÂÂCreate and send multimedia messages. Inbox âÂÂCheck for received multimedia messages. Multimedia messages are automatically stored in the Inbox when they are receive d. You receive a notification when a message arrives in your Inbox . Outbox âÂÂCheck for outgoing multimedia messages. Multimedia messages are automatically st ored in the Outbox as they are sent. If your service is interrupted while sending, then messages are stored in the Outbox until another delivery attempt is made. Sent items âÂÂSent multimedia messages are stored in Sent items . Saved items âÂÂSave multimedia messages for later use in Saved items . Delete messages âÂÂDelete multimedia messages from the Inbox , Outbox , Sent items , or Saved items . Message settings âÂÂChange the settings for multimedia messages. Write and send multimedia messages 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 22 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 23 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Create message . 2. Compose a message using the keypad. See âÂÂCho ose a multimedia message optionâÂÂ, p. 24 for composing options. 3. Select Send to > Recently used , To phone number , To e-mail address , To m a n y , or Distribution lists . 4. Select a number or distribution list, and enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address; or select Search to retrieve a number or e- mail address from your contacts list. 5. Select Send . The multimedia message is moved to the Out box for sending. The wireless network may limit the size of multimedia messages. If the inse rted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by multimedia messaging. It takes more t ime to send a multimedia message than to send a text message. While the multimedia message is being sent, the animated indicator is displayed and you can use other funct ions on the phone. If there is an interruption while the message is being sent, the phone automatically tries t o resend it a few times. If this fails, the message remains in the Outbox and you can try to manually resend it later. Check your Outbox for unsent messages. Note: When sending messages, your device may display the words Multimedia message sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your device to the network. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. Messages th at you send are saved i n Sent items if the setting Save sent messages is s et to Ye s . See âÂÂMultimedia message settingsâÂÂ, p. 27. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. Read and reply to multimedia messages When a multimedia message is received, appears in the display along with the percentage display indicating the download progress. Once the message has been fully downloaded, and a notification appears in the display. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 23 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 24 1. To view the multimedia message immediately, select Show . To save the message to the inbox for later viewing, select Exit . To view a saved mes sage, select Menu > Messa ging > Multimedia msgs. > Inbox and the message you want to view. While viewing a message, select Play to play the entire message 2. Select Options > Reply or Reply to all , and compose your reply. 3. Select Send to and OK to confirm delivery number. If blinks and Multimedia memory full. View waiting message. appears, the memory for mult imedia messages is full. To view the waiting message, select Show . Before you can save the message, you need to delete some of your old messages. See âÂÂDelete multimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 26 for more information. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multim edia messa ge objec ts may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Choose a multimedia message option Create message options When you create or reply to a multimedia message, depending on the mode of text input you are using and the features supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, some or all of the follow ing options are availab le: Send to album âÂÂSend message to an online album. This is an online network service. Check with your service provider for more information. Insert > Image , Sound clip , or Vide o clip âÂÂInsert an image, sound clip, or video cli p file from your Gallery . Open the desired folder, and s elect the file and Options > Insert. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Insert > New image âÂÂOpen the camera to create a new image that you attach to the messa ge. Insert > New sound clip âÂÂOpen t he voice recorder to create a new sound clip that you attach to th e message. Insert > Slide âÂÂInsert a slide into your message. Eac h slide can contai n text, business card, calendar note, one image, and one sound clip. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 24 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 25 Insert > Business card âÂÂInsert contact as a business card. Insert > Calendar note âÂÂInsert a calendar note. Delete > Image , S ound clip , or Video clip âÂÂDelete an image, sound clip , or video clip file from your message. Only appears when your message has a file attachment. Delete > Slide âÂÂDelete the current slide from your message. Edit subject âÂÂEdit the subject head ing. Clear text âÂÂErases all text from the current slide in your message. Preview âÂÂPreview the message or slide presentation before send ing it. Select Stop to end the preview. Select Play to start the preview again or Back to return to the lis t of options. Previous slide âÂÂMove to the previous slide. Option only appears if there is a previous slide. Next slide âÂÂMove to the next sli de. Option only appears if there is next slide. Slide list âÂÂShow s a list of all slides. Select the slide you wish to edit. Slide timing â Set the timing interval for each slide. By default, each slide appears for 12 seconds. Place text first or Place text last âÂÂMove text to the top or bottom of the slide. By defaul t, the tex t appears at the bottom or last. Save âÂÂSaves the message to Saved items . More options > Insert contact âÂÂIns ert a name from your contacts list into your message. More options > Insert number âÂÂInse rt a phone number or find a phone number in the contacts list. More options > Mes sage details âÂÂShow the details of your multimedia message. Exit editor âÂÂExit the message editor. Insert smiley âÂÂInsert a smiley. Insert word or Edit word âÂÂEnter or edit the text of a new word that might not appear in the predi ctive text dictionary. This appears only when predictive text is on. Insert symbol âÂÂInsert a special character. This appears only when predictive text is on. Writing language âÂÂChoose the language you want to use. Dictionary on or Dict ionary off âÂÂTurn predictive text on or off. Matches âÂÂView matches found in the predictive text dictionary for the word you want to use. This appears only when predictive text is on. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 25 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 26 Read message options When you read a multimedia message, the following options are available: Set con trast âÂÂAdjust the contrast of an image. This option is only available when viewing an image. Details âÂÂDisplays the details of a highlighted file attachment. Save image , Save sound clip , or Save video clip âÂÂSave the corresponding file to the Gallery . Images, sound clips, and video clips must be open before you can save them. Save link â Save the corresponding Web link. This appears only when a Web link is highlighted. View text âÂÂView only the text included in the message. Acti va te i mag e , A ctivate tone , or Activate video clip âÂÂView or listen to the corresponding file. Open business card âÂÂOpen an attached busine ss card . Open calendar note âÂÂOpen an attached calendar note. Delete âÂÂDelete the message you are viewing. Reply or Reply to all âÂÂEnter a reply and send it to the original sender and any other recipients of the message . Use detail âÂÂUse a corresponding number or e-mail address. The number or e-mail address must be highlighted Send to number , Send to e-mail , or Send to many âÂÂForward the message to a phone number, to an e-mail address, or to multiple recipients. Album âÂÂForward the message to an online album. This is an online network service. Check with your service provider for more information. Message details âÂÂView the senderâÂÂs name and phone number, the mess age center used, reception date and time, message size and ty pe. Delete multimedia messages If your message memory is full and you have more multimedia messages waiting at the network, blinks in standby mode. You can do the following: ⢠Read some of the unread multimedia messages, and delete them. ⢠Delete multimedia messages from some of your folders. Delete a single multimedia message To delete a single multimedia message, you need to open it first. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. 2. Select the folder containin g the multimedia message you wish to delete. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 26 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 27 3. Select the message you wish to delete and Options > Delete . 4. Select Ye s to delete or No to exit. Delete all multimedia messages in a folder 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Delete messages > Inbox , Outbox , Sent items , or Saved it ems . 2. Select Ye s to delete th e all messages in the folder or No to exit. Multimedia message settings Save sent messages You can save the multimedia messages that you send to th e Sent ite ms folder. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Message settings > Save sent messages > No or Yes . Delivery reports You can request delivery reports to inform you if a message is delivered. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Message settings > Delivery reports > On or Off Scale image down You can request for images to be automatically scale d down. In standby m ode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Message settings > Scale ima ge down > Ye s or No . Default slide timing You can set t he default time in mm:ss for the slides of a multimedia message. In standby m ode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Message settings > Default slide timing , enter a slide time, and select OK . Allow multimedia reception Before you can use the multimedia message feature, you must specify whether you want to receive message at all times or only if you are in the service providerâÂÂs home system. This is a network service. Check with your service provider for more info rmation. The default setting of the multimedia message service is generally on. The appearance of a multimedia message may vary depending on the receiving device. You can choose to receive all messages, to block all mes sages, or to receive messages only when you are in the service providerâÂÂs home netwo rk. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 27 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 28 In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs . > Messa ge settin gs > Allow multimedia recept. and one of the following: Ye s âÂÂAllow all incoming messages. In home network âÂÂAllow incoming messages only if you are in the service providerâÂÂs ho me system. This is a network service. Check with your service provider for more information. No âÂÂBlock all incoming messages. â Distribution lists Distribution lists allow you to send text or multimedia messages to a designated group of people. Create distribution lists 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Distributi on lists > New list . If you cre ate a second distributi on list, select Menu > Messaging > Distribution lists > Options > Create new list . 2. Enter a name for the list, and select OK . 3. To add a contact to this list, select Add new , and add the contacts one by one . A distribution list only contains pho ne numbers of recipients. Add and remove contacts To add contacts, select Menu > Messaging > Distribution lists > the list > Add new . Add the contacts one by one. To remove contacts, select Menu > Messaging > Distribution lists > the list > Options > remove contact name. Use distribution lists 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Distribution lists . 2. Lists you create are displayed. Scroll to the list you wish to modify; select Options and one of the following: Create new list âÂÂCreate a new distribution list. Rename list âÂÂRename the distribution list. Clear list âÂÂClear the distribution list of all current contacts. Delete list âÂÂDele te the distribution list. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 28 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 29 â V oice messages If you subscribe to voice mail, your wireless provider will furnish you with a voice mailbox number. You need to save this number to your phone to use voice mail. When you receive a voice message, your phone will beep, displaying a message, or both. If you receive more than one message, your phone show s the number of message s received . Save voice mailbox number Your wireless provider may have already saved your voice mailbox number to your phone. If so, the number will appear in the display in step 2. Select OK to leave the number unchanged. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Voice messages > V oice mailbox number . 2. If the number is not displayed or incorrect, enter your voice mailbox area code and number. 3. Select OK . Call and set up your voice mail 1. After you save the voice mailbox, in standby mode, press and hold 1. 2. When you connect to voice mail and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the automated instructions to s et up your voice mail. Listen to your voice mail After you set up voice mail, you can dial the number in one of four ways: ⢠Dial the number using the keypad. ⢠Press and hold 1. ⢠Select Lis ten if there is a notification on the display. ⢠In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > V oice messa ges > Listen to voice messages . When you connect and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the automated instructions to listen to your voice messages. Automate voice mail Voice mail services vary by service provider. The following instructions are examples of common operations. Please check with your service provider for specific instructions for using your voice mail service. Write down number and process 1. Write down your voice mailbox number. 2. Call and check your v oice mail as you normally would. 3. Write down your interaction with the recorded prompts step-by-step. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 29 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 30 Note that each voice mail service may vary. Your steps may resemble the following: Dial 2145551212, pause 5 seconds, press 1, pause 2 seconds, press 1234, and press *. â Minibrowser messages Minibrowser messaging is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can check for e-mail messages using the minibrowser. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Minibrowser msgs. > Connect . See âÂÂMobile webâÂÂ, p. 88 for more information on using your phone to access web pages. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 30 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Log 31 5. Log Log stores information about the last 30 missed, 30 received, or 30 dialled calls. It also adds the total duration of all calls. When the number of calls exceed the maximum, the most recent call replaces the oldes t. Whether viewing missed, received, or dialled calls, the menu options are the same: Time of call âÂÂDisplay the date and time of the call. Send message âÂÂSend a message to the number. Use number âÂÂEdit th e number and associate a name with the number. Delete âÂÂClear the number from memory. Call âÂÂCall the number. â View missed calls The missed calls feature does not function when your phone is switched off. Missed calls are calls that were never answered. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Missed calls ; if a missed call notification appears, select List . 2. Scroll to a name or number, select Options , and a menu option. â View received calls Received calls are calls that have been answered. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Received calls . 2. Scroll to a name or numbe r, select Options , and a menu option. â View dialled numbers Dialled calls are numbers you have previously dialled from your phone: 1. In standby mode, press the call key; or select Menu > Log > Dialled numbers . 2. Scroll to a name or number, select Options , and a menu option. â Time of call You can make or receive up to five calls to or from the same number and view the time each call oc curred. Your clo ck must be set for this fe ature to work accurately. 1. While viewing a missed, received, or dialled call, select Options > Time of call . 2. Scroll down to view t he most recent call times from this number. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 31 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Log 32 3. Select Back to re turn to the opt ions list. â Clear log lists You can delete any missed, dialled , or received calls from phone memory. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Clear log lists > All call lists , Missed calls , Received calls , Dialled numbers , or Message recipients . â Call duration Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on call plans, network features, rounding off for billing, taxes and so forth. You can view the duration of your calls. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Call duration and one of the following optio ns: Last call duration âÂÂCheck the time of your last call. Dialled calls' duration âÂÂCheck the combined time of calls you dialled for either Home or Roaming . Received calls' duration âÂÂCheck the combined time of calls you received for either Home or Roaming . All calls' duration âÂÂCheck the combined time of all calls. Life timer âÂÂCheck the total airtime minutes logged on your phone. Clear timers âÂÂEnter your security code, and select OK to clear all timers on your phone. Note: Some timers, including the life timer, may be reset during service or software upgrades. â Duration of data or fax calls Data/fax calls are a network se rvice. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can view the size or duration of sent or received data and fax calls. Note: The actual inv oice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on call plans, network features, rounding off for billing, taxes and so forth. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Data/fax calls and one of the following options: Last sent data/fax âÂÂView the siz e (KB) of the last sent data or fax call. Last received data/fax âÂÂView the size (KB) of the last received data or fax call. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 32 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Log 33 All sent data/fax âÂÂView the si ze (KB) of all sent data and fax calls. All received data/fax âÂÂView the size (KB) of all received data and fax calls. Last data/faxâÂÂs duration âÂÂView the duration time of the last data or fax call. All data/fax callsâ duration âÂÂView t he duration time of all calls. Clear all data/fax registers â Select Ye s to clear all data and fax registers. â Duration of minibrowser calls Minibrowser is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix, for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can view the size or duration of sent or received data from the minibrowser. Note: The act ual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on call plans, network features, rounding off for billing, taxes and so forth. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Minibrowser calls and one of the following options: Last sent browser data âÂÂView the size (KB) of the last send browser data. Last rcvd . brow ser data âÂÂView the size (KB) of the last received data. All sent browser data âÂÂView the size (KB) of all sent browser data. All received browser data âÂÂView the size (KB) of all received browser data. Last browser session âÂÂView the duration time of the last browser session. All browser sessions âÂÂView the duration time of all browser sessions. Clear all browser logs âÂÂSelect OK > Ye s to clear all browser logs. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 33 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 34 6. Contacts The contacts list can hold up to 500 contacts with multiple numbers and text notes for each contact. The amount of numbers and text entries that you can save may v ary, depending on length and the total number o f entries in the contacts list. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts and from the following optio ns: Names âÂÂList of contacts currently on your phone. Settings âÂÂChange your contact settin gs. Caller groups âÂÂAssign contacts to caller groups. Voice tags âÂÂAssign voice commands to phone numbers. Speed dial âÂÂAssign specific keys to phone numbers. My numbe r âÂÂShows t he current number assigned to the phone. Delete all contacts âÂÂDelete all contacts on your phone. To quickly access your contacts scroll up or down while in standby mode. â View contacts In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Names or scroll down to see your current list of cont acts. While viewing your contact list, you can select Det ails for the contact information or Options and one of the following: Search âÂÂSearch your contacts. Add new contact âÂÂAdd a new contact. Delete cont act âÂÂDelete the highlighte d contact. To make a call, highlight a contact, and select Call . â Search contacts In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Names > Options > Sear ch . Enter the first cha racter of the contact name, and highlight the contact you wish to view. Note: If the right s election key on your phone is Names , you can select Names > Options > Search in the standby mode. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 34 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 35 â Add new contacts Save a name and number 1. In standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save. 2. Select Save . 3. Enter the name, and select OK > Done . When you enter a num ber, you can select Options > Insert pause (âÂÂpâÂÂ) to insert a pause code or Op tions > Insert wait (âÂÂwâÂÂ) to insert a wait code. Save a number (only) 1. In standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save. 2. Select and hold Options . Save a contact 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Names > Options > Add n e w . 2. Enter the name, and select OK . 3. Enter the phone number, and select OK . Insert dialling codes You can insert special characters called dialling codes into phone numbers such as voice mail, and save the number to a speed dial location. Dialling codes inst ruct the receiving system to pause, wait, bypass, or accept the numbers that follow them in the dialling st ring. You can automate voice mail with dialling codes. For more information, see âÂÂAutomate voice mailâÂÂ, p. 29. Press * repeatedly to cycle through dialling codes. When the desired code appears in the display, p ause briefly and the code is inserted into the dialling string. The following dialling codes are available: Dialling code Indicates... * Bypasses a se t of instruc- tions. Causes the international access code to be replaced by . p Pauses for 2.5 seconds be - fore sending any numbers that follow. w Waits for you to press the call key before sending the numbers or codes that fol- low. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 35 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 36 Save multiple numbers You can save different types of phone numbers per contact. The first number you save for any en try is automa tically set as the default, but th e default number can always be changed. 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Select the contact to which you want to add a phone number. 3. Select Details > Options > Add detai l > Num ber > General , Mobile , Home , Office , or Fax . 4. Enter the phone number, and select OK . If you want to ch ange the number type, highlight the number and select Details > Options > Change type > General , M obile , Home , Office , or Fax . Save other details To add an address or note an existing contact, do the following: 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Scroll to the contact to whic h you want to add an address or note. 3. Select Details > Options > Add detai l > E-mail address , Web address , Postal address , or Note . 4. Enter the text for the note or address, and select OK . To associate an image or tone to an existing contact, do the following: 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Scroll to the contact to which you want to add an address or note. 3. Select Details > Options > Add detail > Image to s a v e a n i m a g e from the Gallery or to save a new image with the came ra function, or Ton e to select the default tone or a new tone from the Gallery. Change default number To change the default number for an existing contact. 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Select the contact for which you want to change the default number and Details . 3. Highlight the new defaul t number, and select Options > Set as default . Send business cards You can send a busi ness card to a compatible phone or other handheld device. 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Select the contact to which y ou want sent as a bu siness card and Details . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 36 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 37 3. Select the number to use and Options > Send business card > Via multimedia , Via text message , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth . 4. Select Default number or All details . 5. Enter the number for your recipient, or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts; select OK . â Edit contacts 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Highligh t a contact, select Details . 3. Highlight the name, number, detail, or image you wish to edi t and select Options . The type of detail you highlight determines your selection of options. Choose one of the following options: View âÂÂView the phone number of the contact. Add detail > Name âÂÂAdd a name to the contact. This option appears only if the contact does not have a name. Add d e ta i l > Number > General , Mobile , Home , Office , or Fa x âÂÂAdd a number to the contact. Add d e ta i l > E-mail address , We b address , Postal address , Note , Image , or To ne âÂÂAdd an additional detail t o the contac t. Edit name , Edit number , or Edit detail âÂÂEdit the detail of the contact. Change image âÂÂChange the image associated with the contact. Delete âÂÂSelect Delete number to delete a detail or Delete contact to delete the entire contact ent ry from your contacts. Send message âÂÂCreate and send a text message or multimedia message to the contac t. Use number âÂÂDisplay the phone number, ready for use. Set as default âÂÂMake the number the default for the contact. Change type > General , Mobile , Home , Office , or Fa x âÂÂChange the number type. Add voice tag âÂÂAdd a voice tag to the contact. Save to gallery âÂÂSave the image to your Gallery . Send business card > Via infrared , Via text message , Vi a Bluetooth , or Via multimedia âÂÂSend the co ntact as a business card to anoth er phone. Caller groups > Select No group to remove the contact from a caller group or Family , VIP , Friends , Business , or Other to add the contact to an existing caller group. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 37 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 38 Speed dial âÂÂAssign the con tact to your speed dial list. â Modify contact settings In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Settin gs and the setting you wish to change: Scrolling view âÂÂSelect Normal name list , Name and number , Large name li st , or Name and image view. Memory status âÂÂView the amount of phone memory used as well as the amount of phone memory availab le. â Set up caller groups You can add contacts to any of five caller groups, and assign a unique ringing tone or graphic to that group. This enables you to identify callers from the group by their unique ringing tone or graphic. Set up a caller group 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Highlight a contact, select Details . 3. Highlight a number, select Options > Caller groups and the select the caller group you wish to add the number to. Modify a caller group In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Caller groups > Family , VIP , Friends , Business , or Other and one of the following options: Group name âÂÂRename the group to your preference. Group ringing tone âÂÂSet the ring ing tone for the group. Group logo âÂÂTurn the graphic for the caller group on or off. Group members âÂÂAdd or remove members from the caller group. â Set up voice tags Before using voice tags, note the following: ⢠Voice tags are not language- dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. ⢠You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags, and use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names, and avoid similar names for different numbers. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 38 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 39 Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances. Assign a voice tag To use voice dialling, you must first assign a voice tag to a number. 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Highligh t a contact, select Details . 3. Highlight the number you want to assign a voice tag, select Options > Add voice tag . 4. Select Start , then speak clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you want to cance l the recording. 5. After you finish speaking, the phone automatically st ops recording, saves, and replays the voice tag. appears next to the phone numbers which have voice tags assigned. Use a voice tag 1. In standby mode, select and hold Names . 2. When you hear several beeps and Speak now appears, release the key. 3. Pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. When the phone finds t he voice tag, a notification appears, and the phone automatically dials the number. If the phone does not locate a number or recognise the voice t ag, No match found appears. Play back a voice tag 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > V oice tags . 2. Select the voice tag you want to play back, and select Playback . Modify a voice tag 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > V oice tags . 2. Select the voice tag you want to change, and select Change . 3. Select Sta rt , and speak clearly into the microphone. The phone repeats your voice tag, and Voice tag changed appears. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 39 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 40 Delete a voice tag 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Voice tags . 2. Select the voice tag you want to delete, and select Delete . Delete voice tag? appears. 3. Select Ye s to erase the voice tag. â Set up speed dial You can associate any entry in your contacts with a key from 2âÂÂ9; to dial those entries, press and hol d the assigned key. Assign a key to speed dial 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Speed dial . 2. Scroll to any empty slot, and select Ass ign . 3. Enter the number (including the area code), and select OK ; or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts. 4. If necessary, enter the cont act name for the number, and select OK . If Speed dial is off, the phone displays a prompt asking if you want to activate Speed dial . Select Ye s to activa te Speed dial . Change speed dial numbers 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Speed dial . 2. Scroll to the Speed dial entry you wish to change, and select Options > Change . 3. Enter the new number, or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts; select OK . 4. If necessary, enter t he contact name for the number, and select OK to change the key assignment. Delete speed dial numbers 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Speed dial . 2. Scroll to the Speed dial location you wish to delete. 3. Select Options > Delete > Ye s to delete the key assign ment. â Display phone number In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > My number to display your phone number. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 40 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 41 â Delete contacts Delete individual contacts 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Highligh t a contact, and select Options > Delete contact > Yes or No . Delete all contacts 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Del ete all contacts > Ye s . 2. Enter your lock code, and press OK . See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 72 for more information. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 41 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 42 7. Camera You can take photos and record video clips with the built-in came ra and adjust its settings. The camera lens is on the back of the phone. The camera produces photos in JPEG format and video clips in H.263 (QCIF) format. After you take a picture or video, you can attach it to a multimedia message, send it as a multimedia message, save it as a wallpaper, save it to a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite software, and upload it to a Web address with the content image uploader. When you attach a picture to a con tact, the picture is dis played when the contact calls you. If there is not enough memory to take a new photo, delete old photos or other files in the Gallery . This device supports an image capture resolution of 320 x 240 pixel s on the display. The image resolutions in these materials may appear different. Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. When the phone is in camera mode, the interface will switch from portrait to landscape. Turn the phone on its side to use the camera and view the available options. â T ake a photo You can use you r camera to tak e photographs. To take a picture, complete the following steps: 1. In standby mode, press the camera key or select Menu > Camera . This activates the camera. The display is now landscape. If you are in Video mode, select Options > Still image to switch to Still image mode. 2. To take a picture, press the camera key or select Capture to take the 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 42 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 43 photo. Press the volume key displayed here or the scroll keys to zoom in and out. When taking a photo, a shutter sound is heard. The phone saves the photo in the Images folder of the Gallery menu. The saved photo is shown on the display. 3. Select Back to take another photo, Delete to erase the photo, or Options and one of the foll owing: Zoom âÂÂZoom in on a captured photo; scroll to navigate around the photo. New image âÂÂReturns to ca mera mode. Send > Via mult imedia , Via Bluetooth , or V ia infrared âÂÂSend a photo to a compatible phone or PC. Attach to contact âÂÂAttach th e photo to a contact. Rename â Edit the name of the photo. Open Gallery âÂÂOpen the Gallery , where photos are saved. Set contrast âÂÂScroll to adjust the contrast of the photo . Edit image âÂÂOpens the photo for editing. Use image > Set as wallpaper , Set as screen saver , or Set as contact image âÂÂUse the photo. Details > View details of the photo. â Use the self-timer You can use the camera self-timer to delay taking a photo for approximately 10 seconds . 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Sel f-timer on . 2. Select Sta rt . A beep sounds while the self-timer is running, and beeps faster when the camera is about to capture the photo. After the time-out, the camera takes the photo and saves it to the Images folder of the Gallery menu. â T ake a sequence of photos You can use the camera image sequence opti on to take up to four photos in quick succession. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Img. sequence on . 2. Select Sequence . The camera take five photos in sequence. After the photos are taken, the camera sa ves them to a folder in the Images folder of the Gallery menu. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 43 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 44 â Record a video 1. In standby mode, press the camera key or select Menu > Camera . This activates the camera. The display is now landscape. If you are in Still image mode, select Options > Video t o s w i t c h t o Video mode. 2. Select Record to begin recording the video clip. While you are recording, the indicator and the remaining recording time are shown at the top of the display. 3. Select Pa u s e to pause the recording, Continue to res ume the recording, or Stop to s top the recording. The phone saves the video clip in the Video clips folder of the Gallery menu. 4. Select Back to take another video clip, Pl ay to play the video clip, or Options and one of the following. Delete âÂÂDelete the video clip from the Gallery . New video cli p âÂÂReturns to video mode. Send > Via multimedia , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend the video clip to a compatible phone or PC. Rename âÂÂEdit the nam e of the video clip. Open Gallery âÂÂOpens the Gallery , where video clips are saved. Mute audio or Unmute audio âÂÂTurn the video clip sound on or off. Set contrast âÂÂUse the scroll keys to adjust the contrast of the video clip. Use video clip > Set as screen saver âÂÂUse the video clip. Details âÂÂView details of the video clip. â Camera options In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Op tions and from the following: Still image or Video âÂÂChoose camera mode to take a picture or record a video. Mute audio or Unmute audio âÂÂTurn the sound on or off for the video clip. Option only appears when camera is in video mode. Night mode on or Night mode off â Switches the camera night mode on and off. Flash on or Flash off âÂÂTurns the camera flash on and off. Self-timer on or Self-timer off âÂÂTurns the self-timer on and off. This option only appears in still image mode. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 44 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 45 Img. sequence on or Img. s equence off âÂÂTurns image seque ncing on or off. The pictures are then saved to the gallery. This option only appears in still image mode. View pr evious âÂÂView the previous photo or video taken. This option only appears when a photo has been taken during that session. Open Gallery âÂÂOpen the Gallery to view saved images, videos, and recordings. Settings âÂÂChange the settings for the phone camera. â Modify camera settings Image quality Define file compression when saving the image. High-quality images have less file compression and provide t he best image quality, but take more memory. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Image quality > High , Normal , or Basic . Image size Set the size of an image when taking a picture. A larger image has better resolution, but takes more memory. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Image size and a resolution size. Video clip quality Define file compression when saving the video clip. High-quality video clips have less file compression and provide the best video quality, b ut take more memory. In standby m ode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Set tings > Video clip quali ty > High , Medium , or Low . Video clip length You can change the maximum length of a video clip. The maximum size of a video clip can be 600 KB. A recording will stop once it reaches the maximum size, even if the maximum length is set longer. Only video clips that are default length or shorter can be sent in a multim edia mes sage. In standby m ode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Set tings > Video clip lengt h > Default or Maximum . Camera sounds You can turn off the camera sounds that happen when a picture is taken or video recorded. In standby m ode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Set tings > Camera sounds > On or Off . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 45 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 46 Default title You can change the default title your phone uses to assign na mes to new photos and video clips. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Default title > Automatic or My title . If you select My title , enter new text upon which filenames the phone creates are based on. Image storage You can change where your ph one camera stores files. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Image and video storage > Default folder or Other folder . If you sele ct Other folder , locate th e new your new locatio n. This setting in only available when you are using a miniSD card. Default mode You can change the default mode of your phone camera. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Default mode > Standard photo or Video . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 46 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Gallery 47 8. Gallery You can save pictures, video clips, recordings, music files, and ringing tones to folders in the Gallery , and add new folders to the ones already there. You can download images and t ones using multimedia messaging, text messaging, mobile Internet sites, or Nokia PC Suite. Your phone supports a digital rights management system to protect content that you have acquired. A piece of content, such as a ringing tone, can be protected and associated with certain usage rules, for example, the number of usage times or a certain usage period. The rules are defined in the content ac tivation key tha t can be delivered with the content or separately, depending on t he service provider. You may be able to update these activation ke ys. Always check the delivery terms of any content and activation key before acquiring them, as they may be subject to a fee. Copyright protection may p revent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your phone has about 20 MB of memory for storing files in the Gallery . This memory is not shared with other functions, such as contacts. If the phone displays a message that the memory is full, delete some exi sting files before proceeding. You can also use a compatible miniSD card to add memory. Warning: Use only compatible miniSD cards with this device. Other memory cards, such as multimedia cards, do not fit in the miniSD card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. â Open a folder In standby m ode, select Menu > Gallery to view the folder system. The phone folder s ystem includes: Memory card âÂÂIf there is a miniSD card in the phone, the miniSD name is displayed below the signal strength indicator. You ca n access your m iniSD card folder system. Images âÂÂBy default, camera photos are saved to th is folder. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 47 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Gallery 48 Video clips âÂÂBy default, camera video clips are saved to this folder. Music files âÂÂBy default, music files are saved to this fold er. Themes âÂÂA set of themes i ncluded wit h your phone is stored here. Graphics âÂÂA set of graphics included with your phone is stored here. Ton es âÂÂA set of ring tones included with your phone is stored here. Recordings âÂÂBy default, voice recordings are saved to this folder. Received files âÂÂFiles sent direct ly to your phone are stored here. Your foldersâÂÂFolders you create appear after the preset folders. To open a folder, highlight the folder and select Open . Once you open the folder list and highlight a file, you can access the file or the options associated with that specific file type. â Gallery options In standby mode, select Menu > Gallery > Options and one of the following: Rename memory card âÂÂEnter a name for the miniSD card. This option is available only for the miniSD card folder. Format memory card âÂÂDelete all files and folders stored on the miniSD card. This option is avail able only for the miniSD card folder. Delete folder âÂÂDelete a folder yo u have created. You cannot delete a preset folder. Move âÂÂMove the selected folder into another folder. After selecting Move , highlight another folder, and select Move to . Y ou cannot move a preset folder. Rename folder âÂÂRename a folder you have created. You cannot rename a preset folder. Details âÂÂShow the name, size, and d ate of creation of the selected folder. Type of view âÂÂChoose whether to view the folders as a list with details, list only or a grid. Sort âÂÂSort the contents of the selected folder by name, date, format, or size. Add folder âÂÂCreate a new folder. Memory status âÂÂCheck the available memory for the phone handset or the miniSD card. Activation key list âÂÂView the list of available activation keys. You can delete activation keys if desired. Mark or Mark all âÂÂAllows you to mark Gallery folders to be moved into another folder. This function only applies to folders you have created. Other options appear depending on the type of files that exist in the folders. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 48 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 49 9. Media â Music player Your phone includes a Music player for listening to music or other tracks in MP3 or AAC format. You can transfer files from a PC to your p hone using a USB data cable, an infrared, or a Bluetooth wireless technology connection. To transfer musi c tracks from a compatible PC and ma nage the music tracks and track lists, see th e instructions for the Nokia Audio Manager application in the Nokia PC Suite online help. See âÂÂD ata cable transferâÂÂ, p. 69; âÂÂInfrared connectivityâÂÂ, p. 68; and â Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 65 for more information on transferring music tracks to your phone. Music files stored in the Music files folder of the Gallery are automatically detected and added to the default playlist. Music files stored else where, such as in a miniSD card folder, must be defined in a track list before you can listen to th em. You can listen to the sound files through a compatible headset or the phone loudspeaker. You can make or answer a call while using Music player . During a call, the playback is paused. When the call end s, Music player restarts where it left off. Play music tracks In standby m ode, select Menu > Media > Music player . If there are no music files in the Music files folder, you can select anothe r folder before entering th e Music player . The details of the first track on the defau lt track list are shown. To use the graphical keys, , , , or , on the di splay, scroll left or right to the desired key, and select it. Play trackâÂÂTo play a track, selec t . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 49 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 50 Adjust volumeâ To adjust the volume level, use ei ther the volume key or the left and right selection keys. Stop trackâÂÂTo stop the playing, select or press and hold the end key. Skip tracksâÂÂTo skip to the beginning of the next track, select . To skip to the beginning of the previous track, select twice. Rewind or fast forwardâÂÂTo rewind the current track, select and hold . To fast forward the current track, select and hold . Releas e the key at the positio n you want . Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Music player options Select Music files or other music folder and Options and one of the following: Play via Bluetooth âÂÂMake a connection to an audio en hancement using Bluetooth connectivity. Track list âÂÂView all the tracks available on a track list. To play a track, highlight the track, and select Play . Select Options > Send to send the music file. Select Options > Refresh all tracks to refresh the track list (for example, after adding new tracks to the list). Select Options > Change track list to change the track list that is shown whe n you open the Music player menu, if several track lists are availa ble in the phone. Play options âÂÂSelect Random to p lay the tracks on the track list in random order. Select Repeat to play the current track or the entire track list repeatedly. Media equaliser âÂÂThe equaliser enhances the sound qua lity when using a headset (only) with the Music player by amplifying or attenuating frequency bands. There are five preset equaliser settings ( Normal , Po p , Rock , Jazz , and Classical ) and two customisable settings. Headset or Loudspeaker âÂÂWith the headset at tached you can toggle between listening to the Music player through a headset or the loudspeaker. When using a compatible headset, you can skip to the next track by pressing the headset key quickly. To stop the playing, press and hold the headset key. Warning: When using the stereo headset your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the stereo headset where it can endanger your safety. Send > Via multimedia , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend music files to a compatible device. Memory status âÂÂView used and free memory of Handset and Memory card . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 50 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 51 â Radio Your phone has an FM rad io that also functions as an alarm clock radi o. You can listen to the FM radio on your phone through the hands-free speaker enhancem ent or with a headset. For FM stereo, connect a compatible music stand or ste reo headset to th e connector on the bottom of the phone or connect a 2.5 mm headset to the headset port on the side of the phone. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. The quality of a radio broadcast depends on coverage of the radio station in that particular area. Warning: L i s t e n t o m u s i c a t a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Play radio In standby mode, with an enhancement or he adset conn ected, select Menu > Media > Radio . The Radio turns on and plays the last radio frequency you used. To use the graphical keys, , , , or , on the display, scroll left or right to the desired key, and select it. Channel searchâÂÂTo start a channel search, select and hold or . To change the radio frequency in 0.1 MHz steps, briefly press or . Switch offâÂÂPress and hold the end key to turn off the radio. Adjust volumeâÂÂTo adjust the volume level, use the volume key. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 51 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 52 Save channelâÂÂTo save the channel to a memory location 1 to 9, press and hold the corresponding number key. To save a channel to a memory loca tion 10 to 20, briefly press 1 or 2, then press and hold the desired number. Enter the name of the channel, select OK . Select channelâÂÂTo select to a channel, select or . To go directly t o a saved channel, briefly press the corresponding number key. When an application using a browser connection is sending or receiving data, it may interfere with the radio. When you place or receive a call, the radio automati cally mutes. Once the call is ended, the radio switches back on. Radio options In standby mode, select Menu > Media > Radio . The radio turns on. Select Options and one of the following: Tur n o ff âÂÂTurn off the radio. Save sta tion âÂÂEnt er a name for the channel, and select OK . Select one of 20 locations to save the channel locatio n. Statio ns âÂÂSelect from the list of current saved channels on your phone. Use Options > Delete st ation to clear channels or Options > Rename to rename channels. Mono output or Stereo output âÂÂListen to the radio in monaural mode or in stereo (default). Stereo output is availabl e through a ster eo enhancement. Headset or Loudspeaker âÂÂWith the headset atta ched, listen to th e radio through a headset or the loudspeaker. Set frequenc y âÂÂManually en ter the frequency of a known radio station, and select OK . You can also press * to set a frequency. â V oice recorder Voice recorder allows you to make a short (up to 3 minutes) recording and save it to the Recordings folder or another folder in the Gallery . The recorder cannot be used when a data call is active. Record speech or sound 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Media > Voice recorder . 2. To start the recording, select record virtual button. 3. Hold the phone in the normal position near your ear, and record your message. 4. When you are finished recording, select stop virtual button. The recording is given a default name and saved to the Recordings list . The default locati on of the Recordings 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 52 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 53 list is the Recordings folder in the Gallery . After you have made a recording you can select Play last recorded to replay the recording and Send last recorded > Via infrared , Via Blue tooth , or Via multimedia to send the reco rding to a compatible phone. These o ptions are only available during the current recording session. Recording list 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Media > V oice recorder > Options > Recordings list > Record ings . 2. Naviga te through the Recordings folder, and select a recording you want to modify. 3. Select Open to open and play the recording or Options to use the Gallery options. Change the storage folder You can select a folder other than Recordings as the default folder to store your vo ice recording s. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Media > V oice recorder > Options > Select memory . 2. Highlight the new location, and select Set . â Equaliser The equaliser enhances the sound quality when using Music player by amplifying or attenuating frequency bands. There are five preset equaliser settings ( Normal , Po p , Rock , Jazz , and Classical ) and two customisable settings. Activate an equaliser set In standby m ode, select Menu > Media > Equaliser , and highlight the desired equaliser setting, and select Act i va t e . Select Options > V iew to display the equaliser se ttings. Create a custom equaliser set 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Media > Equaliser . 2. Highlight a customisable setti ng, and select Options > Edit . The selected set appears in the display with the bar on the far left highlighted. The bars adjust frequencies, from the lowest (the far left bar) to the highest (the far right bar). The higher the indicator on a particular bar, the more that frequency is amplified. 3. To adjust the lowest frequency, scroll up and down to move the indicator on the bar. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 53 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 54 4. To adjust other frequencies, scroll right and left to move to the other bars. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust th e setting for each frequency. 6. When you are finished, selec t Save . 7. To rename t he setting, select Options > Rename , enter a new name, and select OK . 8. To activate the setting, select Acti va te . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 54 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 55 10 . S e t t i n g s Use the Settings menu to change profiles, display settings, themes, tone settings, time and date se ttings, call settings, phone settings, voice commands, connectivity, enhancem ents, s ecurity se ttings, application settings, network settings, network services, restore factory settings, and view phone details. â Profiles Profiles define how your phone rea cts when you receive a call or message, how your keypad sounds when you press a key, and more. Ringing options, keypad tones, and other settings fo r each of the available profiles can be left at their default s etting, or personalised to suit your needs. The following profiles are available: General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , and two customisable profiles. Profiles are also available for enhancements su ch as a headset and car kit. See âÂÂEnhancement settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. Activate a profile In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Profiles > General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , or custom pr ofile > Act i va t e . Personalise a profile To modify a profile, do the following: In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Profiles > General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , or custom pr ofile > P ersonalise > and a profile option. You can not rename the General profile. To personalise profile tones, see âÂÂTonesâÂÂ, p. 57. Set a timed profile Timed profiles can be used to prevent missed calls. For example, suppose you attend an event that requires your phone be set to Silent be fore the event starts, but you forget to return it to General until long after the event. A timed pro file can prevent missed calls by returning your phone to the default profile at a time you specify. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 55 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 56 To set a timed profile, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Profiles > General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , or custom profile > Timed . 2. Enter the time for the profile to expire, and select OK . Timed profiles can be set up to 24 hours in advance. â Display Standby mode settings Wallpaper You can set either an Image or a folder of images ( Slide set ) as wallpaper for the phone display. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Standby mode settin gs > Wallpaper and one of the following: On âÂÂActive wallpaper on your phone. Off âÂÂDeactivate wallpaper on your phone. Image âÂÂChoose an image from the Gallery for wallpaper. Select Open to brows e the Graphics folder. Select the image of your choice for the wallpaper. Slide set âÂÂSelect a folder in your Gallery to act as a slide show for the wallpa per. Font colour You can set font colour of your phone when in standby mode. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Standby mode settings > Standby font color . 2. Scroll to select a colour from the colour grid. Banner Banner is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can choose whether the display shows the operator lo go or a custom banner, when the ph one is in standby mode. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Banner > Default or Pe r s o na li se . Screen saver You can choose a screen saver for the phone display. In standby mode, select Menu > Se ttings > Disp lay > Screen saver and one of the following: On âÂÂActivate screen saver on your phone. Off âÂÂDeactivate screen saver on your phone. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 56 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 57 Screen savers > Image , Slide set , Video Clip , Digital clock , or Open Camera â Choose an image, video clip or other option to act as your screen saver. Time-out > Modify the idle time before the screen saver activates. Note: Power saver is automatically activated following screen saver time- out to optimise battery life. Sleep mode Sleep mode is a power-saving feature that turns the phone display off during inactivity. You can activate the sleep mode feature on your phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Sleep mode > On or Off . When Sleep mode is activated the display is completely blank. A blinking LED indicator shows that the phone is still on. Backlight time-out You can contr ol the time-out of the backlight on your phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Backlight time- out > Default (15 seconds). To ch ange the time-out between 15 seconds and 4 minut es, select Personalise . â Themes Themes allows you to personalise the ringtone, screensaver and backgroun d on your phone. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Themes > Select theme and a theme of your choice. â Ton e s You can adjust the ringing volume, keypad tones, and more for the active profile. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Ton es and one of the following: Incoming call alert âÂÂSelect how your phone will alert you when there is an incoming call: Ringing , As ce nd in g , Ring once , Beep once , Off . Ringing tone âÂÂSelect Open Gallery > Ton e s to select the ringing tone for incoming calls. Ringing volume âÂÂUse the left and right scroll keys to set the volume o f your ringing tone. Vibrating alert âÂÂActivate the vibrating call alert. Select On to activate the vibrating alert. Message alert tone â Select the alert tone for incoming messages: Off , Standard , Special , Beep once , Long & loud , Ringing tone . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 57 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 58 Keypad tones âÂÂUse the left and right scroll keys to set the volume of your keypad tones (or turn them off). Warn in g t one s âÂÂTurn warning and confirmation tones on or off Alert for âÂÂSet the phone to alert only when a member of a selected caller group calls. See âÂÂSet up caller groupsâÂÂ, p. 38 for more information. â Time and date Clock Show or hide the clock In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Clock > Sho w clock or Hide clock . Set the time 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and dat e > Clock > Set the time . 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm forma t), and select OK . 3. Select am or pm (t his option displays only when 12-hour format is in use ). Change the time zone In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Clock > Time zone and you r time zone bas ed on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), plus or minus hours in your time zone. For example, GMT-8 is US Pacific time in Los Angeles, CA. GMT does not include Daylight savings time, so add or subtract accordingly. Change the format In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Clock > Time format > 24 -hour or 12-h our . Date Show or hide the date In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Date > Show date or Hide date . Set the date In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Date > Set the date , enter the date, and select OK . Change the format 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Date > Date format and the format of your choice. 2. With Date on the display, select Date separator , and the separator of your choice. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 58 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 59 Set the auto-update of date and time Auto-update is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can allow the digital network to set the clock, which is useful when you are out of your home area (for example, when you have traveled to another network or time zone). In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Auto- update of date/time > On , Con firm first , or Off . If you use the Auto-update of date/ time option while outside your digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually. Network ti me will replace the time and date when you reenter your digital network. If your battery has been removed or has discharged outside the digit al network, you may be prompted to enter the time ma nually (once the battery is replaced or recharged, and you are still outside of the digital network). â Call Anykey answer When Anykey answer is on, briefly press any key except the right selection or end key to answer a call. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Anykey answer > On or Off . Automatic re dial Occasionally, your network may experience heavy traffic, resulting in a fast busy signal whe n you dial. With automatic redial activated , your phone redials the number, and notifies you once the network is available. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Automatic redial > On or Off . Speed dial To activ ate or deacti vate Speed dial , do the following: In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On or Off . For more information on Speed dialling , see âÂÂSet up speed dialâÂÂ, p. 40. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 59 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 60 Answer when slide opened Set your phone to answer a call when you open the slide. If the setting is off, you must press the call key after you open the slide. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > An sw . when s lide opened > On or Off . End call when slide closed Set your phone to end a call when you close the slide. If the setting is off, you must press the end key after you close the slide. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > End call when slide closed > On or Off . Calling card If you use a calling card for long distance calls, you can save t he calling card numbers in your phone. Your phone can store up to four calling cards. Save information 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Calling card . 2. Enter your security code or lock code, and select OK . (See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 72.) 3. Scroll to one of the four me mory locations, and select Options > Edit > Dialling sequence . 4. Select one of the following sequence types: Access phone card âÂÂDial the access number, th e phone number, the card number and PIN, if required. Access card phon e âÂÂDial the access number, th e card number and PIN, if required, then pho ne number. Prefix phone card âÂÂDial the prefix (numbers that must precede the phone number) and phone number you want to dial, then card number and PIN, if required. 5. Enter the required information (access number or prefix and card number), and select OK to confirm your entries. 6. Select Card name . 7. Enter the card name, and select OK . Contact your calling card co mpany for more information. Make calls After you have saved your calling card information in your phone, you can make a call using your calling card. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Calling card . 2. Enter your security code or lock code, and select OK . 3. Scroll to the calling card of your choice, and select OK . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 60 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 61 4. Pres s the end key to return to standby mode; then enter the phone number, including any prefix (such as 0 or 1) that your calling card may require when you make a calling card call. See your calling card for instructions. 5. Press and hold the call key for a few seconds until Card call is displayed. 6. When you hear th e tone or system message, select OK . International prefix If supported by your service provider, you can store an international prefix into your phone. When you enter at the beginning of a phone number, your phone automatically inserts the international prefix that you have stored. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > International prefix . 2. Enter the international prefix (for example, 0011), and select OK . 3. In standby mode, enter and the phone number you want to call. For example, 3546789. The phone dials the international prefix you have stored in your phone and the phone numbe r you have entered. For example, the phone dials 0011354789 . Data and fax calls Receive data or fax calls Data/fax calls is a network s ervice. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can set up the phone to send or receive data or fax calls when a terminal, such as a PDA or PC, is connected. For better performance during data calls, place the phone on a stationary surface. Do not move the phone by holding it in your hand during a data call. For more information on connectivity, refer to the PC/PDA Connectivity Guide. The PC/PDA Co nnectivit y Guide can be downloaded from the Nokia website at www.nokia-asia.com. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Data/fax ca lls > Incoming data/fax call and one of the following: General âÂÂThe phone receives incoming calls as usual. Data calls only âÂÂThe phone receives only data calls. Fax calls only âÂÂThe phone receives only fax calls. 2. Select Da ta calls only or Fax calls only . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 61 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 62 3. When you are finished receiving the fax or data call, re peat steps 1 and 2, and select Ge neral . View data transfer You can view the transmission speed when sending or receiving data or fax calls. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Dat a/fax calls > Data rate display > Graphic or Off . Call summary Your phone can display the time spent on a call when you hang up. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Call summary > On or Off . Show call time on display Your phone can display the call time during the phone call. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Sho w call time on displ ay > On or Off . Ringing tone for no caller ID You can select a different ringing tone for calls received with no caller ID. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Ring. tone for no caller ID > On or Off . See âÂÂPersonalise a profileâÂÂ, p. 55 for more information on selecting a ringing tone. â Phone Language settings Phone language allows you set the language of the display text seen on the phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Se ttings > Phone > Phone language and the language of your choice. Automatic keyguard Automatic keyguard allows you to automatically lock your phone after a defined time. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Automatic keyguard > On or Off . Navigation key If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, you can set the feat ures that are a ctivated when you press the scroll key. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Navigation key . 2. Highlight the scroll up, s croll down, scroll right, or scroll left arrow; select Change . 3. Select a function to assign to the action. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 62 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 63 Memory status You can view the memory usage of your phone or miniSD card. If you do not have a miniSD card, you will only see the options for your phone memory. Some or all of the following options are available on your phone. Phone memory In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Memory status > Phone and one of the following possible options. Free memory âÂÂShow the amo unt of phone memory available for file storage. Contacts âÂÂShow th e amount o f phone memory currently used for Contacts. Text messages âÂÂShow the amo unt of phone memory currently used for Text messsages. Gallery âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for Gallery. Organiser âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for Organiser. Applications âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for Applications. Multimedia msgs. âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for Multimedia messages. Card memory In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Memory status > Card name and one of the following: Free memory âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory available for file storage. Used memory âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for file storage. Size âÂÂShow the total amount of phone memory you can use for file storage. Security keyguard If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, Automatic keyguar d controls whether the security keyguard is on or off. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Automatic keyguar d > On or Off . DTMF tones DTM F t on e s are th e tones that sound when you press the keys on your phone keypad. Yo u can use DT MF t on e s for many automated dial-up services such as banking and airlines or for entering your voice mailbox number and password. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 63 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 64 DTM F t on e s are sent during an active call. You can send them manually from your phone keypad, or send them automatically by savi ng them in your phone. Set type In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > DT M F t o ne s > Manual D TMF tones and one of the following: Continuo us âÂÂThe tone sounds for as long as you press and hold a key. Fixed âÂÂUsed to se nd tones of the duration you specify in the DTM F to ne length option. Off âÂÂUsed to turn off tones. No tones are sent when you press a key. Set length You can also spec ify DTMF tone length when using the Fixed option. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > DT M F t o ne s > DTMF tone length > Short (0.1 seconds) or Long (0.5 seconds). Start-up tone If the Start-up tone is activate d, the tone sounds when you turn on your phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Sett ings > Phone > Start-up tone > On or Off . Help text activation Your phone displays brief descriptio ns for most menu items. When you arrive at a feature or menu, pause for about 15 seconds and wait for the help text to display. Scroll to page through the full help text, if necessary. The default setting for help text is on. However, you can turn help text on or off. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Help text activation > On or Off . â V oice commands You can set up t o five Voice commands , which allow hands-free operation of certain phone features. Add a voice tag Before using Vo ice commands , you must first add a voice tag to the phone function. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > V oice commands . 2. Select a function option you wish to tag, and select Ad d . 3. Select Start , and speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you wa nt to cancel the recording. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 64 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 65 The phone replays then saves the recorded tag. appears next to the function option for which you add a voice tag. Activate a voice command After you have associated a voice command tag with a phone function, you can issue a command by speaking the voice command tag. 1. In standby mode, select and hold Names . 2. When Speak now appears, pronounce the vo ice tag clearly into the microphone. When the phone finds the voice command tag, Found: appears, and the phone plays the recognised voice command tag through the earpiece. The function you reques ted is activated. Voice command options You can modify voice c ommand tags. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > V oice commands , highlight the voice command tag, and select one of the following options: Play âÂÂListen to the voi ce command tag. Options > Change âÂÂChange the voice command tag. Options > Delete âÂÂErase the voice command tag. â Connectivity You can connect th e phone to a compatible device using an IR connection. You can also connec t the phone to a compatible PC using IR or a USB data cable; and use the phone as a modem to enable connectivity from the PC. For more information, see the Nokia PC Suite online help. Nokia PC Suite and all related software can be downloaded from the U.S. Mobile Phone products section of www.nokia- asia.com/ pcsuite. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protect ion agains t harmful software. Bluetooth connectivity Bluetooth technology connectivity enables cost-free wirele ss connections between electronic devices and can be used to send and receive images, texts, gallery files, voice recordings, video clips, notes, business cards, and calendar notes. It can also be used to connect wirelessly to products that use Bluetooth wireless technology, such as computers. Yo u can synchronise your phone and your PC using Bluetooth connectivity. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 65 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 66 Since devices with Bluetooth connectivity communicate using radio waves, your phone and the other device do not nee d to be in direct line-of -sigh t. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 30 feet (10 meters ) of each other. The conn ection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. The Bluetooth wirele ss technology application whether used actively or in the backgroun d, consumes the battery and reduces the operating time of the phone. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 1.2 and supports the following profiles: ⢠Object push profile (OPP) ⢠File transfer profile (FTP) ⢠Dial-up networking profile (DUN) ⢠Generic object exchange profile (GOEP) ⢠Headset profile (HSP) ⢠Hands-free profile (HFP) ⢠Generic access profile (GAP) ⢠Serial port profile (SPP) To ensure interope rability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the m anufacturer s of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technol ogy in some locations. Check with your loca l authorities or service provider. If you want more information on this function, vi sit the Bluet ooth Technology organisation website: https://www.bluetooth.org/. Pairing You can set up a perma nent association (pairing) between your phone and another device with Bluetooth technology. So me devices may require pairing before data transfer can take place. To pair with a device, you and the owner of the other device must agree on a pass code of 1âÂÂ16 numeric characters. Th e first time you try to connect the devices, you must each enter the same p ass code. Once the devices are paired, you will not need t o use the pass code again, so there is no need to remember it. Paired devices are placed in your paired device list. You can view the list even when Bluetooth connectivity is not active or when the devices in the list are not available for connection. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluetooth > P aired devices > Options and one of the following: 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 66 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 67 Assign short name âÂÂGive a nickname to the selected device (visible to you only). Auto-conn. withou t conf. â Select No if you want the phone to connect to the selected device automatically or Ye s if you want the phone to ask for your permission first. Delete pairing â Delete the pairing to the selected device. P air new device âÂÂSearch for active devices with Bluetooth technology within range, scroll to the desired device, and select Pai r to establis h pairing with that device. Do not accept Bluetooth connectiv ity from sou rces you do not trust. Bluetooth connectivity settings You can define how your phone is shown to other devices with Bluetooth connectivity. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluet ooth > Bluetooth settings and one of the following: My phone's visibility âÂÂSelect Shown to all to show the phone to all other devices with Bluetooth connectivity or Hidden to show the phone only to the paired devices. Operating the phone in hidden mode is a safer way to avoid malicious software. My phone's name âÂÂChange your phone name that is seen by other users. Set up a connection 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluetooth > On . The active Bluetooth technology connection is indicated by at the top of the display. 2. Select Search fo r audio enhancements to search for compatible devices with Bluetooth connectivity. The list of found devices appears in the display. 3. Select the desired device. 4. If required, enter the Bluetooth connectivity pass code of the device to pair with the device. Your phone connects to the device. You can start data transfer. To view the device yo u are connected to, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Act i ve device . To deactivate Bluetooth connectivity, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Off . Deactivation of the Bluetooth technology connection will not affect other functions of the phone. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 67 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 68 Send dat a Instead of using the Connectivity menu, you can use other phon e menus to send various types of data to other device s with Bl ueto oth connectivity. For example, you can send a video clip from the Video clips folder of the Gallery menu. See the appropriate sections of the user guide for information about sending different types of data. Receive a data transfer When a Bluetooth technology connection is active in your phone, you can receive notes, business cards, video clips, and other types of data transfers from another device with Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a data transfer, an alarm sounds, and a message appears in standby mode. To view the transferred item immediately from the standby mode, select Show . To view the item at a later time, select Exit . Depending on the nature of the item, it is saved in the appropriate menu in your phone. For example, a business card would be saved in Contacts , and a calendar note would be saved in Calendar . Infrared connectivity You can set up the phone to receive data through its infrared (IR) port. To use an IR connection, transmiss ion and reception must be to or from an IR compatible phone or device. Warning : Do not point the IR beam at anyoneâÂÂs eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Send and receive data 1. Ensure th at the IR ports of the sending and receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices in an IR connection is from 7.6 centimeters (3 inches) to 0.9 mete rs (3 feet). 2. To activate IR in your phone, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Infrared . 3. The user of the other device should activate IR as well. If data transfer i s not started within 2 minut es after the activation of the I R port, the connection is cancelled and must be restarted. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 68 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 69 Connection indicator ⢠When is shown continuously, the IR connection is activated and your phone is ready to send or receive data using its IR port. ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to the other device or a connection has been lost. Data cable transfer You can transfer data from your phone to a compatible PC, or from a compatible PC to your phone using a CA-53 USB data cable. Important: Di sconnect the USB data cable from the phone to make a call. Enable default mode connection Connect to your PC in Default mode to transfer phone data and files between your phone and PC using NokiaâÂÂs PC Suite. 1. Connect your PC and your phone with a CA-53 USB data cable. A notification appears on the display asking which mode you want to select. 2. Select OK > Default mode . A notification appears on the display stating a connection is active. You can now use PC Suit e to connect to your phone. Enable data storage connection Connect to your PC in Data storage mode to transfer music, photo, and video files to the phone miniSD card, and from the phone miniSD to your PC with Windows Explorer. 1. Connect your PC and your phone with a CA-53 USB data ca ble. A notification appears on the display that asking which mode you want to select. 2. Select OK > Dat a storage . The notification Data storage mode displays while the ph one is in data transfer mode. 3. Open Windows Explorer. Your phone miniSD card will appear as a local drive (named by Nokia 6265), and with a drive letter assigned to it. 4. Click on the folders to display a window that shows the contents of the folder on the phone miniSD card. 5. Open a second instance o f Windows Explorer and display on your PC, the contents of the folder where you have stored the MP3 files, photo files, or video files. 6. Select on your PC the files t hat you wish to transfer t o the phone. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 69 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 70 7. Drag and drop the files from the second window in to the first window and place them in a folder. 8. The files are transferred to the phone and can be played by the Music player , or accessed by the Media player . If you select a file o r files that require more memory than can fit on the available phone memory, you w ill get an error note. Deselect some of your selected files until the required memory is less than or equal to the available memory on your phone. Disable data storage connection 1. To disable the USB data cable, double-click the green arrow on the task bar at the bottom of your PC screen. A window pops up that shows Unplug or Eject Hardware. 2. Click on USB Device in th e Hardware devices window. A popup window shows St op a Hardware device. 3. Highlight USB device, and click OK. The popup window Safe to Remo ve Hardware is shown with the message âÂÂThe âÂÂUSB Deviceâ device can now be safely removed from the syste mâÂÂ. 4. Click OK. Important: To ensure that all memory card operations are completed in a controlled way, do not unplug the connectivity cable until Windows notifies you that it is safe to do so. Uncontrolled completion or unexpected disruptions of the memory card operations may cause the memory card and th e information stored on it to become corrupted. A corrupted memory card may have to be formatted before it can be used again. When a memory card is formatted, all information on the card is permanently lost. Data and fax transfer You can make data and fax tran sfers during a phone call. For more information, see âÂÂData and fax callsâÂÂ, p. 61. â Enhancement settings The Enhancem ent settings menu displays the hearing aid compliant option by default, and shows other options only if the phone is or has been connected to a compatible enhancement type. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 70 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 71 Headset In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Headset and one of the follow ing: Default profile âÂÂChoose the profile you wish to be automati cally ac tivated when a headset is connected. Automatic answer âÂÂCalls are answered automatic ally after on e ring when a headset is connected. Select On or Off . Note: Automatic answe r will only be active whilst â General â profile is active Handsfree In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Handsfree and one of the follow ing: Default profile âÂÂChoose the profile you wish to be automati cally ac tivated when a car kit is co nnected. Automatic answer âÂÂCalls are answered automatic ally after on e ring when a car kit is connected. Select On or Off . Note: Automatic answe r will only be active whilst â General â profile is active Lights âÂÂChoose to keep t he phone lights always on, or t o shut off automatic ally after seve ral seconds. Select On or Automatic . Loopset A LPS-4 Loopset accessory al lows your device to optimise sound quality when coupled with a hearing aid that is set to T-coil mode. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Loopset > Use Loopset > Yes or No . If the Loopset is connected and recognised through the Pop-Port⢠connector, the phone automatically uses the Loopset . Charger In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Charger and one of the following: Default profile âÂÂSelect the profil e you want to automa tically activate when your phone is connected to the charge r. Lights â Select On or Automatic to keep the phone lights al ways on or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Hearing aid To optimise sound qualit y, you can set your phone to couple to a T-coil- equipped hearing aid. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Hearing aid > T-coil hearing aid mode . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 71 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 72 Select O n to activate the HAC. Verify that the hearing aid is set to T- coil mode, and hold the p hone against the ear. Only activate the T-coil hearing aid mode when using your device with a hearing aid or it may impact the audio performance of the device. â Security To access Security for the first time, you must enter the preset lock code. By default, the preset lock code is the last four digits of your phone number. Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, the preset lock code may be a four digit number such as 1234 or 0000. If none of these work, contact your wireless service provider or networ k operator for help. Phone l ock The phone lock feature protects your phone from unauthorised outgoing calls or unauthorised access to information stored in the phone. When phone lock is activated, Phone locked is displayed each time you turn your phone on. When the device is locked, you can st ill call the official emergency number programmed into your phone. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . 3. Select Phone lock and one of the following: Off âÂÂImmediately turns off the phone lock feature. Lock now âÂÂImmediately turns on the phone lock feature. On power-up âÂÂTurns on the phone lock feature the next time you turn the phone on. If you select Lock now , you must enter your lock code before the phone will function normally. After the lock code is accepted, your phone functions normally. Call not allowed appears if you attempt to place a call w hile your phone is locked. To answer a call with phone lock on, select Ans wer , or press the call key. Allowed number if lock active With phone lock on, the only outgoing calls you can make are to the emergency number programmed into your phone (for example, 000, 111, or 911) and the numbers stored in the Allowed no. if lock active location. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 72 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 73 3. Select Allowed no. if lock active > Ass i gn . 4. Enter the phone number, or s elect Search to retrieve the number from the phone book; select OK . To place a call to an allowed number when the phone is locked, ente r the allowed number and press the call key. Change lock code When changing the lock code, avoid using codes similar to emergency numbers such as 0 00, 111, or 911 to prevent accidental dialling of an emergency number. By default, the preset lock code is the last four digits of your phone number. Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, the preset lock code may be a four-digit number such as 123 4 or 0000. If none of these work, contact your wireless service provider or network operator for help. If you enter an incorrect lock code five times in a row, your phone may ask you for the security code. By default, the security code is the five- digit number, 12345. Note: If you en ter the wrong lock code five times in succession, your phone will not accept your current lock code for 5 minutes. This occurs even if when you power down the phone between incorrect attempts. To change the phone lock code, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Securi ty . 2. Enter the current lock code, and select OK . 3. Select Change lock code . 4. Enter the new lock code (only 4 characters), and select OK . 5. Enter the new lock code ag ain for verification, and select OK . When you change your lock code, make sure to reme mber it. If nece ssary, write it down and store it in a safe place away from your phon e. Avoid entering a lock code similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental emergency calls. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 73 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 74 Call restrictions Call restrictions allows you to block or allow numbers for incoming or outgoing calls. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . 3. Select Call restrictions and the type of calls you wish to restrict: Restrict outgoing calls âÂÂSet restrictions on making calls. Restrict incoming calls âÂÂSet restrictions on receiving calls. 4. Select whether to block or allow numbers: Blocked numbers âÂÂSet numbers that are blocked on incoming calls, allowing all other numbers. When a number is blocked, the call is sent to voice mail. Allowed numbers âÂÂSet numbers that are allowed, blocking all other numbers. 5. To modify the restriction list, select from the following options: Select âÂÂAdd numbers to the restriction list. Add restriction âÂÂAdd a restriction to a number (unavailable if memory is full). Edit âÂÂEdit a restriction on a number. Delete âÂÂDelete a number from restriction list. When calls are restricted, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Voice privacy V oice privacy is a network service, and its function depends on a variety of services. Contact your service provider for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, the voice privacy feature protects the privacy of your current phone conversation from other callers placing phone calls on your same network. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . 3. Select V oice privacy > On or Off . â Application settings The Applicat ion settings menu changes game and application settings. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Application settings and one of the following: Application sounds > On or Off âÂÂPlay sounds during an application. Application lights > Application defined or Default âÂÂPlay lights during an application. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 74 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 75 Application vibration > On or Off â Vibrate phone during an appl ication. â Network The menu options you see in your phone are based on your service providerâÂÂs network. The network determines which options act ually appear in the phon e menu. Check with your service provider for more information. The Network menu personalises the way your phone chooses a network in which to operate while you are within or outside of your primary or home system. Your phone is set to s earch for the most cost-effective network. If your phone cannot find a preferred network, it selects a network automatically based on the option you choose in the Network menu. Roaming options If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, you can select which roaming option you wish to use. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Ro aming options and the following: Automatic âÂÂThe phone automatically searches for service in another digital network. If one is not found, the phone uses analog service. The roaming rate applies when not in the home service area. Mode If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, you can choose whether your phone will use digital or analog service. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Mode and the following. Digital only âÂÂYou can make and receive calls on a digital network only. â Network services The following features are network services. See also âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix. Store a feature code Network feature setting allows you to activate netw ork services in your phone using feature codes received from your service provider. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Network feature setting . 2. Enter the feature code from your service provider (for example, *900 for activating Divert if busy ), and select OK . 3. Select Ca ll divert . 4. Scroll to the type of forwarding that matches the feature code you entered (for example, Divert if busy ), select Activate . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 75 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 76 The activated feature code is now stored in your phone, and you are returned to the Feature code: prompt. Continue entering ot her feature codes (for example, *900 to cancel Divert if busy ), or press the end k ey to return to standby mode. When you enter a network feature code successfully the feature becomes visible in the Network services menu. Call divert Call divert tells your network to redirect incoming calls to another number. Cal l divert is a network service and may not work the same in all networks, so contact your wireless provider for availability and information. To activate, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call divert and the following: Divert all calls âÂÂForward all calls to the number you specify. 2. Select Ac ti v at e . 3. Enter the number to wh ich your calls, data, or other information are forwarded, and select OK . To cancel, in standby mode, s elect Menu > Sett ings > Network services > Call divert > Cancel all call diverting . Cancel all call diverting may affect your ability to receive voice mail messages. Contact your wireless provider for specific details. â Restore factory settings You can reset som e of the menu settings to their original values. Data that you have entered or downloaded is not deleted (for e xample, entries in your contacts list are not affected). 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Restore factory sett. 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . Note: Depe nding on your wireless service provider or network operator, your device may request the security code (defaulted to 12345) instead of the lock code. â Phone details You can view the current details of your phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Se ttings > Phone details and one of the following options: User details âÂÂShow the phoneâÂÂs current number details. V ersion details âÂÂShow the hardware, software and browser version information for the phone. System details âÂÂShow the digital network the phone is on. Icon details âÂÂShow the icons used. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 76 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 77 11 . O r g a n i s e r Your phone c ontains feat ures to help organise your everyd ay life, including an alarm clock, calendar, calculator, countdown timer, and stopw atch. â Alarm clock Set an alarm The alarm clock is based on the phone clock. It sounds an alert any time you specify and even works if the phone is turned off. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm time . 2. Enter the ti me for the alarm in hh:mm format, and select OK . 3. Select am or pm if 12-hour clock format is on. Alarm on appears briefly in the display, and appears in standby mode. If you need to reset the alarm select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm time > On from standby mode. To turn off the alarm, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm time > Off from standby mode. Repeat alarm You can set the alarm to repeat every day or only on certain days of the week. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Repeat alarm > On . 2. Check the day or days of the week you wish to repeat the alarm, and select Mark . Select Unmark to remove a day. 3. Select Do ne when you have added all desired days. If you need to revise the days for a repeated alarm, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Repeat alarm > Repetition days from standby mode. If you need to stop a repeated alarm, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Re peat alarm > Off in standby mode. Set the alarm tone You can set which tone is played when the alarm sounds. In standby m ode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm tone and one of the following: 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 77 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 78 Standard âÂÂSelect the default alarm. Radio âÂÂSelect the radio as the alarm. Open Gallery âÂÂSelect a tone from the Gallery as the alarm. Set the snooze time-out You can set the Snooze time-out for the alarm. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > S nooze time-out and choose a snooze time. When the alarm sounds, your phone beeps, vibrates (if vibrate alert is on in the currently active profile), and lig hts up. With the phone on, sele ct Stop to shut the alarm off or Snooze . If you sele ct Snooze , the alarm stops for 10 minutes. If you do not press a key, the alarm stops (snoozes) for t he Snooze time- out , then sounds again. If the alarm time is reached while t he phone is switched off, the phone switches itself on and starts sound ing the alarm tone. If you s elect Stop , the device asks whether yo u want to activate the phone for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Ye s to make and receive calls. D o not select Ye s when wireless phone use may cause interfe rence or dan ger. Turn an alarm off In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm time > Off . â Calendar The calendar keeps track of reminders, calls you need to make, meetings, memos, and birthdays. It can even sound an alarm for any of these events. Monthly view provides an overview of the selected mont h and weeks. You can also jump to a specific date. Any days or dates that appear in bold font contain calendar notes such as a meeting or reminder. A short summary of notes for the day appears at the bottom of the screen. Open calendar In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar . Scroll to move the cursor in the calendar view. Calendar options In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar > Options and one of the following: Week view âÂÂView your calendar by weeks. To return to month view select Back , while in the Week view . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 78 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 79 Make a note âÂÂCreate a note on the selected date. Go to date âÂÂJump to a specific d ate. Enter the date (for example, 15/07/ 2005), and select OK . Go to today âÂÂJump to th e current date. Settings âÂÂModify the calendar settings. Go to to-do list âÂÂGo directly to your to- do list. Delete all notes âÂÂDelete all calendar notes. Make a calendar note You can make a calen dar note for a specific date. You can choose from five types of notes. Your phone asks for further information depending on which note you select. You can also set an alarm for your note. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar . 2. Highligh t the date for which y ou want to make a note. Scroll or select Options > Go to date . 3. Select Options > Make a note and one of the following: Meeting âÂÂEnter the subject, and select Sav e . Enter a location, and select Sav e . Enter a start and end time. Choose an alarm option. Call âÂÂEnter the phon e number, and select Sav e . Enter a name, and select Save . Ent er a time. Choose an alarm option. You can also select Options > Search to search your cont acts. Birthday âÂÂEnter the personâÂÂs name, and select Save . Enter the year of birth. Choose an alarm option. Memo âÂÂEnter the subjec t, and select Save . E nter a start and end date. Choose an alarm opt ion. Reminder âÂÂEnter the reminder, and select Save . C hoose an alarm option. View calendar notes (day view) You can view the calendar notes for a day. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar . 2. Scroll to the date you want to view or select Options > Go to dat e . Days w ith notes appear in bold type. 3. Select View to see the l ist of notes for that day. To view a specific note, highlight the note, and select View again. If there are no notes for that date, select Add to create a ne w calendar note . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 79 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 80 Options while viewing a day When viewing a dayâÂÂs list of note, you can highlight a note, select Options and one of the following: Make a note âÂÂCreate a new note for the selected date. Delete âÂÂDelete the note. Edit âÂÂEdit the note. Use detail âÂÂUse a detail contained in the note. Mov e âÂÂMove the note to another date on your calendar. Repeat âÂÂEnable the note to recur on a regular basis (daily, weekly, biweekly, monthly, and yearly). Repeat is not available for Birthday note. Go to date âÂÂJump to another date on your calendar. Go to today âÂÂReturn to the curren t date. Send not e > Send as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend a calendar note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, in a multimedia message, or directly to another device. Copy âÂÂCopy the note. You can past e the note to anot her date. Settings âÂÂModify the calendar settin gs. Go to to-do list âÂÂGo directly to yo ur to- do list. Send a calendar note 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar . 2. Highlight th e note you wish to send, and se lect Options > Send note > Send as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth to send the calendar note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, in a mult imedia message, or directly to another device. Receive a note in calendar format (vCal) When you receive a calendar note in calendar-to-calendar format (vCal), your phone displays Calendar note received . Select Show to view the calendar note. Select Save to sa ve the note t o your calendar or Options > Discard to discard the note. Modify calendar settings In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar > Options > Settings and one of the following: Set the date âÂÂEnter the current date, and select OK . Set the ti me âÂÂEnter the current time, and select OK . Time zone âÂÂSelect your current time zone. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 80 Fr iday, November 18, 20 05 11:54 AM
Organiser 81 Date format âÂÂSelect your preferred date format. Date separator âÂÂSelect your preferred date separator. Time format âÂÂSelect your preferred time format. Default view âÂÂSel ect a monthly or weekly view. Wee k s ta rt s âÂÂSelect the day the week starts. Auto-delete notes âÂÂSelect w hen to delete past notes. â Notes You can write text notes with the Notes . You can also send not es using text message, IR, or Bluetooth connectivity. Open notes In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes . You see your current list of notes. If there are no notes, select Ad d to create your first note. If there are existing notes, highlight a note, and select View . Make a note Initial note In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes > Ad d . Create yo ur note, and select Save . Additional notes In standby m ode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes > Options > Make a note . Create your note, and s elect Save . Create note options When you create a note, the following options are available: Insert time and date âÂÂAdd the time and date to your note. Close âÂÂReturn you to the notes list. Insert smiley âÂÂInsert a smiley into your message. Insert word or Edit word âÂÂEnter or edit the text of a new word that might not appear in the predi ctive text dictionary. Option only appears when predictive text is on. Insert symbol âÂÂInserts a special character into your m essage. O ption only appears when predictive text is on. Dictionary on or Dict ionary off âÂÂTurn predictive text on or off. Matches âÂÂView matches found in the predictive text dictionary for the word you want to use. T his displays only when predictive text is on. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 81 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 82 Send a note 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes . 2. Highlight the note you wish to send, and select Options > Send note > Send as mess age , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth to send the note in a text message, in a multimedia message, or directly to another device. Notes options In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes > Options and one of the following: Make a note âÂÂCreate a new note. Delete âÂÂDelete the note you se lected. Edit âÂÂEdit the note you selected. Use detail âÂÂUse a detail contained in the note. Send not e > Send as message , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend a note in a text message, in a multimedia message, or directly to another device. Delete all notes âÂÂDele te all notes. The note options appear only when you have created one or more notes. â T o-do list Use the To-do list feature to keep track of your tasks. You can save a task or errand as a to-do list note, s elect a priority level for the to-do list not e, and mark it as done when you have completed it. You can sort the to-do list notes by pri ority or by date. Open to-do list In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > To-do list . You see your current to-d o list. If there are no to-do tasks, select Add to create your first to-do l ist note. If there are existing to-do list notes, highlight a to-do list note, and select View . Make a to-do list note Initial to-do list note In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > To-do list > Ad d . En ter the subject, and select Save > High , Medium , or Low . Additional to-do list notes In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > To-do list > Options > Add . Ente r the subject, and select Save > High , Medium , or Low . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 82 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 83 Create to-do list note options When you create a to-do list note, the following options are available: Insert smiley âÂÂInsert a smile y into your message. Insert word or Edit word âÂÂEnter or edit the text of a new wo rd that might not appear in the predictive text dictionary. This displays only when predictive text is on. Insert symbol âÂÂIns ert a special character into your me ssage. This displays only when predictive text is on. Writing language âÂÂChoose the language you wa nt to use. Dictionary on or Dictionary off âÂÂTurn predictive text on or off. Matches âÂÂView matches found in the predictive text dictionary for the word you want to use. This displays only when predictive text is on. Edit to-do list notes In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > T o-do list > View > Edit . Edit the subject, select Save . View to-do list notes In standby m ode, select Menu > Organiser > T o-do list > View . Deadline âÂÂChange the deadline of the to-do list note. M a r k n o t e a s d o n e or Mark as not done âÂÂIndicate whether the to-do list note is completed or not. Delete âÂÂDelete the to-do list note. Use detail âÂÂUse a detail contained in the note. Edit priority âÂÂChange the priority to High , Medium , or Low . Send > Se nd as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend the to-do list note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, in a multim edia mes sage, or directly to another device. Go to calendar âÂÂLeave the to-do list, and go to the calendar. Save to calendar âÂÂSave the to- do list note to your ca lendar. Send a to-do list note 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > T o-do list . 2. Highlight the note you wish to send, and select Options > Send > Send as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth to send the to-do list note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 83 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 84 in a mul timedia message, or directly to another device. To-do list options In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > To-do list > Options and one of the following: Add âÂÂCreate a new to-do list note. Delete âÂÂDelete the to-do list note you selected. Mark note as done or Mark as not done âÂÂIndicate whether the to-do list note is completed or not. Use detail âÂÂUse a detail contained in the note. Sort by deadline or Sort by priority â Sort the to-do list by either date or priori ty. Send > Send as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend the to-do list note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, in a multimedia message, or directly to another device. Go to calendar âÂÂLeave the to- do list, and go to the cale ndar. Save t o cal endar âÂÂSave the to-do list note you selected to your calendar. Delete done notes âÂÂDelete the t o-do list note you selected to your calendar. Delete all notes âÂÂDele te all to-do list notes. The to-do list options appear only when you have created one or more notes. â Calculator The calculator in your phone adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, calculates the square and the square root, changes the sign of the number entered, and converts currency values. Note: This calculat or has a limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. Use calculator 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calculator . 2. Enter the first number in the calculation. Press # for a decimal point if necessary. Press the scroll key up or down to change the sign of your number or value. Press * to cycle through the add ( ), subtract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/) characters. Pause briefly to select the displayed character. 3. Enter the second number in your calculation. 4. Select Equals . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 84 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
85 To perform a square or square root calculation, select Options > Square or Square root . Currency converter You can convert foreign currency to domestic, or vice versa, directly from standby mode or from the Calculator menu. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calculator > Options > Exchange rate > Foreign units in domestic or Domestic unit s in foreign . Foreign units in domestic âÂÂThe number of home units it takes to make one unit of foreign currency. Domestic units in foreign âÂÂThe number of foreign units it takes to make one unit of your ho me currency. 2. Enter the exchange rate (press # to insert a decimal), and select OK . 3. Select Back to return to the Calculator screen, and ente r the currency amount to convert. 4. Select Options > In domestic or In foreign . In domestic âÂÂconverts forei gn currency to domestic currency. In foreign âÂÂconverts domestic currency to foreign currency. 5. If you have not alrea dy entered an exchange rate, the device prompts you to enter it. Select OK . You can edit the exchange rate at any time. â Countdown timer The countdown timer in your device enables you to enter a specific time (up to 99 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds). When the time runs out, your device sounds an alarm. The countdown timer only works when the phone is on. Once you turn off your phone, the timer is no longer active. Set the normal timer 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Countdo wn timer . 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm :ss format), and select OK . 3. Enter a note for the timer, and select St art . and the timer (in hh:mm:ss format) appear in standby mode when the countdown timer is running . When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm, vibrates, and flashes its lights. If you are in standby mode, select Restart or Exit . If you are not in 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 85 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
86 standby mode, press any key during the alarm to stop the timer. After 60 seconds the tim er alert expires automaticall y. Select Exit or press the end key to clear the timer note. Change the timer After you hav e set a timer, you c an change the time. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Countdo wn timer > Change time . 2. Enter the new time, and select OK . 3. Leave the note as it was, or enter a new note, and select Start . Stop the timer before the alarm sounds After you have set the timer, you can stop the timer. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Countdo wn timer > Stop timer . â Stopwatch Your phone has a stopwatch that can be used to track time . The stopwatc h displays time in hours, minutes, seconds, and fractions of a second in hh:mm:ss.s s format. Using the stopwatch or allowing it to run in the background when using other features increases the demand on battery power and reduces battery life. Measure split or lap time Use the split time or lap time functions for activities where you need to pace yourself. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Stopwatch > Split timing or Lap timing > Start . Split timing âÂÂUse the split time function for such activities as a long distance race when you need to pace yourself. Select Split to note the lapsed time. The timer continues to run and the s plit time appears below the running time. Each time you select Split , the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. The maxi mum number of splits is 20. Lap timing âÂÂUse the lap time function when you want to track how long it takes to comp lete each cycle or lap. Select Lap to note the lap time. The clock stops, then immediately restarts from zero. The lap time appears below the running time. Each tim e you select Lap , the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. The maxi mum number of laps is 20. 2. Select Stop to end timing and display total ti me. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 86 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
87 Save a time To save a time while the clock is running, select Stop > Save , enter a name for the measurement, and select OK . If you do not enter a name, the total time is used as the default title for the lap or split time. Stopwatch options In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Stop watch and one of the following: Continue âÂÂContinues to me asure time. Only appears if clock is running and you are returning to stopwatch screen. Show last time âÂÂView the last measured time. Split timing âÂÂUse the split time function. Lap timing âÂÂUse the lap time fu nction. View times âÂÂBrowse s aved times. Delete times > One by one or De lete all âÂÂDelete saved times. Operation note If you press the end key and return to standby mode, the clock continues to run in the background, and appears at the top of the screen. To return to the Stopwatch screen, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Stopwatch > Continue . 2. To stop the clock, select Stop . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 87 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Mobile web 88 12. Mobile web Mobile web is a network s ervice. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix, for more information. Your phone has a built-in browser you can use to connect to selected services on the mobile Internet. If your wireless service provider or networ k operator supports this feature, you can view weather reports, check news or flight times, view financial information, and much more. The Web browser on your phone can display WAP-based content. Your device may ha ve some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you cho ose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as you would with any Internet site. If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data trans mission b etween th e device and the Internet gateway or server is encrypted. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Important: Use only services that you trust and th at offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. â Mobile Internet access Because mobile Internet content is designed to be viewed from your phone, your wireless provider is now your mobile Internet service provider as well. Your wireless provider has created a home page and set up your browser to go to this page when you log on to the mobile Internet. Once at your service providerâÂÂs home page, you may find links to a number of other sites. It should not be necessary to manually configure the browser on your phone. Normally this is done by your wireless provider when you subscribe to the feature. Contact your wireless provider if you have problems using the browser. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 88 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Mobile web 89 â Sign on to the mobile Internet In standby mode, select Menu > Mobile web . After a brief pause, your phone attempts to connect to your wireless providerâÂÂs home page. If you receive an error message, your phone may not be set up for browsing. Contact your wireless provider to make sure that your phone is configured properly. â Navigate the mobile Internet Since your phone screen is much smaller than a computer screen, mobile Internet content is displayed differently than you may be accustomed to seeing. Thi s section contains guidelines for using phone keys to navigate a WAP site. Phone keys ⢠To browse the WAP site, scroll up or down. ⢠Select a highlighted item. ⢠To enter text, press # to switch text input modes, and then press 0-9. ⢠To enter special characters, press *. Receive a call while online Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, you may still be able to receive a voice call while using the WAP browser. ⢠To answer the incoming call, press the call key. ⢠To reject the incoming call, press the end key. After you end your voice call, the mobile Internet connection automatically resumes . If your wireless service provider or network operator does not support incoming calls while browsing, incoming calls are automatically forwarded to voice mail. Make an emergency call while online You can end your dat a connection and make an emergency call. 1. To close your mobile Internet connection, press the end key. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 3. Enter the emergency number for your present location (for example, 000, 111, or 911). Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 89 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Mobile web 90 Clear the cache and disconnect A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have ac cessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache while in the browser menu, select Navigate > Advanced > Clear. Highlight and s elect Cache > Clear. The cache also clears when you press and hold the end key to power off your device. To close your mobile Internet connection while browsing, press t he end key. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 90 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Extras 91 13. Extras â Games Select games In standby mode, select Menu > Extras > Games to display the game s on your device. Memory status You can view the memory available for game installations. In standby mode, select Men u > Extras > Games > Options > Memory status . â Collection Select application In standby mode, select Menu > Extras > Collection > Select application. Scroll to an application and select Open, or press the call key. An application may require a few seconds to load. When you open an application, wait for the launch screen to disappear. At that point, the application is ready. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Note: Only install applications from sources that offer adequate protection against harmful software. Memory sta tus You can view the memory available for application installa tions. in standby mode, select Menu > Extras > Collection > Op tions > Memory status . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 91 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
PC connectivity 92 14. PC connectivity â PC data transfer You can transfer dat a, such as music, photos, and videos, from your device to a compatible PC or from a compatible PC to your device using Bluetooth connectivity. For more information, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 65. You can transfer dat a, such as music, photos, and videos, from your device to a compatible PC or from a compatible PC to your device using an IR connection. For more information, see âÂÂInfrared connectivityâÂÂ, p. 68. â Nokia PC Suite Nokia PC Suite software is available for this phone. Nokia PC Suite is a collection of powerful tools that you can use to manage y our phone features and data. Ea ch component is a separate program that includes online helps. Nokia PC Suite software, installation instructions, and other documentati on is provid ed free of cha rge and can be downloaded from the software downloads of the Nokia w eb site: www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite. Some of the features in your phone require network support. Contact your service provider for availability and configuration instructions. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 92 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Enhancements 93 15. Enhancements Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the AC-3 or AC-4 charger. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular mode l. The use of any other types may invalidate any approv al or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord A few practical rules about accessories and enhancements: ⢠Keep all accessories and enhancem ents ou t of the re ach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the co rd. ⢠Check regularly that enhancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠Installation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualified personnel only. Power ⢠Standard 1150 mAh Li-Ion Battery (BL-6C) ⢠Compact Charger (AC-3) ⢠Travel Charger (AC-4) ⢠Mobile Charger (DC-4) ⢠Charger Adapter (CA-44) Use the CA-44 charger adapter to connect the phone with Nokia chargers with a larger barrel size, including ACP-7, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, AC-1 (retractable charger), and LCH-12 (mobile charge r). USB data cable ⢠Connectivity Cable (CA-53) 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 93 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Enhanc ements 94 Handsfree ⢠Headrest Handsfree (BHF-3) ⢠CDMA Headrest Handsfree (BHF-4) ⢠Easy to Use Car Handsfree (HF-3) ⢠Advanced Plug-in Car Handsfree (HF-6) ⢠Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree (HF-6W) Headsets ⢠Mono Heads ets (HDB-4, HS-5, HS-6, HS-8, HS-9) ⢠Stereo Headsets (HDS-3, HS- 3, HS-23) ⢠Wireless Mono Headsets (HDW-3, HS-4W, HS-11W, HS-21W, HS-36W, HS -37W)) ⢠Wireless Image He adsets (HS-13W) ⢠Wireless Stereo Headse ts (HS-12W) Miscellaneous ⢠Induct ive Loops et (LPS-4 ) â¢T T Y A d a p t e r ( H D A - 1 0 ) ⢠Advanced Car Kit (CK-1W) ⢠Wireless Car Kit (CK-7W) ⢠Digital Pen (SU-1B) â¢A u d i o A d a p t e r ( A D - 1 5 ) ⢠Music Stand (MD-1) 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 94 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Reference information 95 16. Reference information This section provides information about your phone batteries, enhancem ents, c hargers, safety guidelines, and technical information. Be aware that the informat ion in this section is subject to change as batteries, chargers, and enhancements change. â Batteries and chargers Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger and then disconnect and reconnect it to start the charging . Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave fully charged battery connected to a cha rger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit th e battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (Thes e look like metal strips on the batt ery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 95 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Reference information 96 between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in t emperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispos e as household waste. â Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia batt ery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the packaging and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you ha ve any reason to believe that your battery is not an authen tic original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to th e nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistanc e. Your authorise d Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If auth enticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purch ase. Authenticate hologram 1. When looking at the hologram on the label, you shou ld see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. 3. Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for example, 1234567891987 6543210. Turn the battery so that the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 96 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Reference information 97 4. Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokiaoriginals.com/check. To create a text message enter th e 20-digit code, for example, 1234567891987 6543210, and send to 44 7786 200276. To create a text message, ⢠For countries in Asia Pacific, excluding India: En ter the 20 -digit code, for example, 1234567891987 6543210, and send to 61 427151515. ⢠For India only: Enter Battery followed by the 20-digit battery code, for example, Battery 1234567891987 6543210, and send to 5555. National and international operator charges will apply. You should receive a message indicating whether the code can be authenticated. If you need assist ance confirm ing the battery code, contact your local Nokia Care Ce ntres listed at www.nokia-asia.com/ carecent relocato r. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia ba ttery, please do not us e the battery. Take it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device . To find out more about original Nokia ba tteries, visit www.nokiaoriginals.com/battery. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 97 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Care and main tenance 98 17. Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the devi ce dry. Precipitation, humidity and all t ypes of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperat ures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake t he device. Rough handling c an break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes, before sending your device to a service facility. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility for service. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 98 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Additional safety information 99 18. Additional safety information Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. â Operating environment Remember t o follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when us ed either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least xx centimeters (xx inches) away fro m the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain met al and you should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality co nnection to th e network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed unti l such a connection is availa ble. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the t ransmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic ma terials may be a ttracted to the device, and persons with a hearing aid should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. â Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospital s or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum sep aration of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consiste nt with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should: 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 99 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Additional safety information 100 ⢠Always keep the device more than 15.3 centimeters ( 6 inches) from the pacemaker; ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket; and ⢠Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device and move the device away. Hearing aids Some digital w ireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, c onsult your service provider. â Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (ant ilock) braking systems, el ectronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified person nel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device . Check regula rly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or e xplosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, o r enhancements. For vehicles equipped w ith an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in- vehicle wireless equipme nt is improperly installed and the air b ag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. â Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explos ive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially e xplosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily inju ry or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio eq uipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 100 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
Additional safety information 101 a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. â Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this phone, operate using radio signals, w ireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 3. Enter the offi cial emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your se rvice provider. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless phone may be the only means of communication a t the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so . â Certification information (SAR) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONA L GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guideline s and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific o rganisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Speci fic Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg)*. Tests for 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 101 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
Additional safety information 102 SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest ce rtified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power req uired to rea ch the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is xxx W/kg. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. Additional SA R information may be provided under product information at www.nokia-asia.com. * The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 W/kg averaged over 1 0 grams of body tissue. The guideline s incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions , please look under product information at www .nokia.com. â Battery information This section provides information about battery charging times with the Compact Charger (AC-3), the Travel Charger (AC-4), talk-times, and standby times. Be aware th at the information in this section is subject to change. For more information, contact your servic e provide r. Charging times The following charging times are approximate with the BL-6C 1150 mAh Li-Ion battery: Travel Charger (AC-4): up to 1 hour 45 minutes Compact Ch arger (AC-3): up to 3 h ours Talk and standby times Operation times are estimates only and depend on signal st rength, phone us e, network conditions, features used, battery age and condition (including charging habits), temperatures to which the battery is exposed, and many other factors. Talk time: 3 to 4 h ours (digital) Standby time: 8 to 12 days 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 102 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
103 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED W ARRANTY NOTE! This Limited Warranty is in addition to, and does not affect your legal (statutory) rights under your applicable national laws relating to the sale of consumer products. Nokia Corporation (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) provides this Limited Warranty to person who has purchased the Nokia product(s) included in the sales package (âÂÂProductâÂÂ). Nokia warrants to you that during the warranty period N okia or a Nokia authorised service company will in a commercially reasonable time remedy defects in materials, design an d workmanship free of charge by repairing or, should Nokia in its absolute discretion deem it necessary, replacing the Product in accordance with this Limited Warranty (unless otherwise required by law). This Limited Warranty is only valid and enforceable in the country where you have purchased the Product provided that it is intended for sale in that country. Warranty P eriod The warranty period starts at the time of Product's original purchase by the first end-user. The Product may consist of several different parts and different parts may be covered by a different warranty period (hereinafter âÂÂWarranty PeriodâÂÂ). The different W arranty Periods are: a) twelve (12) months for the mobile device and accessories (wheth er included in the mobile device sales package or sold separately) other than the consumable parts and accessories listed in (b) and (c) below; b) six (6) months for the following consumable parts and accessories: batteries, chargers, desk stands, headsets, cables and covers; and c) ninety (90) days for the media on which any softwar e is provided,e.g. CD-rom, memory card. As far as your national laws permit, the Warranty Period will not be extended or renewed or otherwise affected due to subsequent resale, repair or replacement of the Product. However, repaired part(s) will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period or for sixty (60) days from the date of repair , whichever is longer . How to get warranty service. If you wish to make a claim under the Limited Warranty , you may cal l the Nokia call center (where this is available and please note national rates apply to calls) and/or where necessary, return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location. Information about Nokia care centers, Nokia designated service locations and Nokia call centers can be foun d at local Nokia web pages where available. You must return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location before the expiry of the Warranty Period. When making a Limited Warranty claim you have to present: a) the Product (or affected part thereto), b) the legi ble and unmodified original proof of purchase, which clearly indicates th e name and address of the seller, the date and place of purchase, the product type and the IMEI or other serial number . This Limited Warranty extends only to the original first end-user of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end-user . What is not cover ed? 1. This Limited Warranty does not cover user manuals or any third party software, settings, content, data or links, whether included/downloaded in the Product, whether included during installment, assembly , shipping or at any other time in the delivery chain or otherwise and in any way acquired by you. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s), Nokia does not warrant that any Nokia software will meet your requirements, will work in combination with any hardware or software applications provided by a third party, that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error free or that any defects in the software are correctable or will be corrected. 2. This Limited Warranty does not cover a) normal wear and tear (including, without limitation, wear and tear of camera lenses, batteries or displays), b) transport costs, c) defects caused by rough handling (including, without limitation, defects caused by sharp items, by bending, compressing or dropping, etc.), d) defects or damage caused by misuse of the Product, including use that is contrary to the instructions provided by Nokia (e.g. as set out in the Product's user guide) and/or e) other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 103 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
104 3. Thi s Limited Warranty does not cover defects or alleged defects caused by the fact that the Product was used with, or connected to, a product, accessories, software and/or service not manufactured, supplied or authorised by Nokia or was used otherwise than for its intended use. Defects can be caused by viruses from your or from a third party's unauthorised access to services, other accounts, computer systems or networks. This unauthorised access can take place through hacking, password-mining or through a var iety of other means. 4. Thi s Limited Warranty does not cover defects caused by the fact that the battery has been short-circuited or by the fact that the seals of the battery enclosure or the cells are broken or show evidence of tampering or by the fact that the battery has been used in equipment other than those for which it has been specified. 5. Thi s Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been opened, modified or repaired by anyone other than an authorised service centre, if it is repaired using unauthorised spare parts or if the ProductâÂÂs serial number, the mobile accessory date code or the IMEI number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or are illegibl e in any way and this shall be determined in the sole discretion of Nokia. 6. Thi s Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been exposed to m oisture, to dampness or to extreme thermal or environmental conditions or to rapid changes in such conditions, to corrosion, to oxidation, to spillage of food or liquid or to influence from chem ical products. Other imp ortant not ices A third party, independent operator provides the SIM card and cellu lar and/or other network or system on which the Product operates. Therefore, Nokia will not accept responsibility under this warranty for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of the cellular or other network or system. Before the Product can be repaired or replaced, the operator may need to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock that may have been added to lock the product to a specific network or operator . Accordingly , Nokia does not accept responsibility for any delays in warranty repairs or for the inability of Nokia to complete warranty repairs that are caused by the operator's delay or failure to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock. Please remember to make back-up copies or keep written records of all important content and data stored in your Product, because content and data may be lost during repair or replacement of the Product. Nokia, in a manner consistent with the provisions of the section entitled âÂÂLim itation of Nokia's Liabilityâ below, to the extent permitted by applicable law(s), shall not under any circumstances be liable, either expressly or impliedly, for any damages or losses of any kind whatsoever resulting from loss of, damage to, or corruption of, content or data during repair or replacem ent of the Product. All parts of the Product or other equipment that Nokia has replaced shall become the property of Nokia. If the returned Product is found not to be covered by the term s and conditions of the Limited Warranty , Nokia and its authorised service companies reserve the right to charge a h andling fee. When repairing or replacing the Product, Nokia may use products or parts that are new, equivalent to new or re-conditioned. Your Product may contain country specific elements, including software. If the Product has been re-exported from its original destination country to another country , the Product may contain country specific elements that are not considered to be a defect under this Limited Warranty . Limitation of Nokia's liability This Limited Warranty is your sole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and Nokia's sole and exclusive liability in respect of defects in your Product. However , this Limited Warranty shall neither exclude nor limit i) any of your legal (statutory) rights under the applicable national laws or ii) any of your rights against the seller of the Product. This Limited Warranty replaces all other Nokia warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written, (non-mandatory) statutory , contractual, in tort or otherwise, including, w ithout limitation, and where permitted by applicable law, any implied conditions, warranties or other terms as to satisfa ctory quality or fitness for purpose. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s) Nokia does not assume any liability for loss of or damage to or corruption of data, for any loss of profit, loss of use of Products or functionality, loss of business, loss of contracts, loss of revenues or loss of anticipated savings, increased costs or expenses or for any indirect loss or damage, consequential loss or damage or special loss or damage. To the extent permitted by applicable law , NokiaâÂÂs liability shall be limited to the purchase value of the Produ ct. The above limitations shall not apply to death or person al injury resulting from NokiaâÂÂs proven negligence. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 104 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
105 Statutory obligations This Limited Warranty must be read subject to any statutory provisions that imply war ranties or conditions into this Limited Warranty that cannot be excluded, restricted or modified or cannot be excluded, restricted or modified except to a limited extent. If such statutory provisions apply, to the extent to which Nokia is able to do so, its liability under those provisions will be limited, at its option to, in the case of goods: the replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods, the repair of the goods, the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods, or the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired; and in the case of services: the supplying of the services again or the payment of the cost of having the ser vices supplied again. NOTE! Your Product is a sophisticated electronic device. Nokia strongly encourages you to familiarise yourself with the user guide and instructions provided with and for the Product. Please also note that the Product might contain high precision displays, camera lenses and other such parts, which could be scratched or otherwise damaged if not handled very carefully . All warranty information, product features and specifications are subject to change without notice. Nokia Corporation Keilalahdentie 2-4 FIN-02 150 Espoo Finland 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 105 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
106 Index A About your device ix Active profile 55 Alarm c lock repeating 77 setting 77 tone 77 turn off 78 Allowed number if lock active 72 Analog service 75 Answer calls 10 slide open 60 Antenna 6 Anykey answer 59 Applications collection 91 settin gs 74 Authenticate hologram 96 Automat ic keyguard 62 redial 59 update of time and date 59 voice mail 29 B Back c over remove 6 replace 7 Backlight time-out 57 Banner 56 Battery 6 , 102 charge 7 charging times 102 remove, replace 7 talk and standby times 102 Bluetooth connectiv ity 65 receive data 68 set up 67 settin gs 67 Business cards 36 C Calendar 78 make notes 79 open 78 options 78 receive, send notes 80 settings 80 view 79 Call divert 76 duration 32 log, see logs 31 register, see logs 31 settings 59 summary 62 time 32 Caller groups 38 Calling cards 60 Calls answer 10 conference 10 duration 32 make 9 mute phone during 11 options during 11 restrictions 74 show times on display 62 silence 10 Camera changing options 44 photo sequence 43 recording videos 44 settings 45 take photos 42 use self-timer 43 Certification information (SAR) 101 Change lock code 73 Charger 71 , 95 connect 7 times 102 Clock settings, see time and date Conference calls 10 Confirmatio n tones 58 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 106 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
107 Contacts add 35 delete 41 edit 37 search 34 settings 38 view 34 Countdown time r 85 Currency converter 85 Custom profile 55 D Data call duration 32 calls 61 transfer 92 Date setti ngs, see ti me and date dialled 31 Dialled numbers 31 Dialling codes 35 Digital service 75 Display main menu 4 settings 56 Distribution lists 28 DTMF tones 63 E Emergency calls 89 , 101 End calls 10 slide closed 60 Enhancements 70 approved 93 Equaliser 53 ESN xi Extras 91 F Fax calls 32 , 61 Feature codes 75 File transfer 69 FM radio, see radio Folders, see gallery Font colour 56 G Gallery opening folders 47 options 48 Games 91 Go to functions 5 H Handsfree settings 71 Headset connect 8 settings 71 Hearing aid settings 71 Help get xi in-phone 4 text activation 4 , 64 I Indicators and icons 2 Infrared 68 International prefix 61 Internet, see wire less Internet K Keyguard automatic 62 lock and unlock 11 security 63 Keypad tones 57 L Language 62 Lap time 86 Listen to voice mail 29 Lock code change 73 preset 72 Logs clearing 32 dialled numbers 31 missed calls 31 received calls 31 Loopset settings 71 Loudspeaker 11 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 107 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
108 M Main menu display 4 Make calls 9 ManufacturerâÂÂs limited warranty 103 Memory card 63 checking status 63 phone 63 Messages minibrowser, see minibrowser messages multimedia, see multimedia messages text, see test messages voice, see voice messages Minib rowse r call duration 33 messages 30 MiniS D card 8 memory 63 Missed calls 31 Mobile web 88 Multimedia messages 21 create 22 , 24 delete 26 folders 22 read 23 reply 23 send 23 settin gs 27 Music playe r 49 Mute phone 11 My phone number, display 40 N Navigation key 62 Network approved for ix services ix , 75 settin gs 75 Network services ix No caller IDs 62 Nokia battery authentication guidelines 96 Nokia Care Contact Centre xi Nokia PC Suite 92 Nokia support and contact information xii Notes 81 make 81 open 81 options 82 send 82 O Organiser 77 P PC connectivity 92 Phone care and maintenance 98 details 76 keys and parts 1 language 62 lock 72 memory 63 set up your 6 Photographs 42 Play music tracks 49 radio 51 Predictive text 14 Profiles 55 Q Quick keys 2 R Radio options 52 play 51 Received calls 31 Recording sound 52 Repeating alarm 77 Restore factory settings 76 Ring tone for no caller ID 62 volume 57 Roaming options 75 S Safety information viii battery 102 explosive environments 100 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 108 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
109 hearing aids 10 0 operating environment 99 pacemakers 99 vehicles 100 Screen saver 56 Scroll method 3 Security 4 keyguard 63 settings 72 Self-timer, camera 43 Sequence of photos 43 Set alarm 77 date 58 time 58 Set up speed dial 40 Settings 55 Shared memory x Show call time 62 Sleep mode 57 Slide answer calls 60 end calls 60 Snooze time-out 78 Speed dial 59 Split time 86 Standby mode 2 settings 56 Standby time 102 Start-up tone 64 Stopwatch 86 T Talk time 102 Text en try changing language 13 predictive 14 standard 13 Text messages create 17 delete 20 folders 16 read 18 reply 18 send 17 settings 20 templates 18 Theme 57 Time and date 58 Timed profiles 55 To-do list edit 83 make 82 open 82 options 84 send 83 view 83 Tones 57 DTMF 63 start-up 64 Transfer files 69 Turn phone on or off 8 V Vibrating alert 57 Videos 44 Voice commands 64 privacy 74 recorder 52 Voice messages automate 29 listen 29 mailbox number 29 setting up mailbox 29 Voice tags assign 39 delete 40 modify 39 use 39 Volume 10 W Wallpaper 56 Warning tones 58 Wireless Internet access 88 clear cache 90 disconnect 90 make emergency call while online 89 receive call while online 89 sign on 89 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 109 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
LEGAL INFORMATION Copyright é2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nokia 6265, Pop-Port, and the Nokia Original Enhancements logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other company and product names mentioned here in may be trademarks or trade names of their resp ective owners. Bluetooth wireless technology is a regist ered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. miniSD is a registered trademark of the SD Card Association. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 6265 product. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCI DENTAL, AN D CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED âÂÂAS IS.â EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARR ANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT L IMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOS E, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCU RACY AND REL IABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT . NOKIA RESERV ES THE R I G H T T O R E V I S E T H I S D O C U M E N T O R W I T H D R A W I T A T A N Y T I M E W I T H O U T P R I O R N O T I C E . EXPORT CONTR OLS This device may contai n comm odities, technology, or software subject to export laws and regulations from the U.S. and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. 9244299 Issue 1 ii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -10 Fr iday, November 18 , 2005 11:54 AM
Contents For your safety .............................. viii About your device .................... .............. ix Network Services ...................... ............... x Shared memory .............. ......................... xi Welcome .......................................... xi Getting help .... ...................... ................. xi Find your phone label ............... ....... xi Nokia support and contact information .................. ...................... xii 1. Phone at a glance ........................ 1 Keys and parts ...................... .................. 1 Standby mode ................. ........................ 2 Quick keys ........ ........................... ............. 2 Indicators and icons ..... ...................... .. 2 Phone menus .. ........................... ............. 3 Scroll method .............. ........................ 3 Main menu display .......... .................. 4 In-phone help.................... .................. 4 Security functions .... ........................... .. 4 Go to functions ......... ..................... ........ 5 Select options ............................. ........ 5 Organise functions................ ............. 5 2. Set up your phone .............. ......... 6 Antenna ............................ ...................... .. 6 Battery .... ..................... ........................... .. 6 Remove the back cover .................... 6 Remove the battery ......... .................. 7 UIM (CDMA SIM) card slot . ............. 7 Replace the battery ......................... .. 7 Replace the back cover .................... 7 Charge the battery........... .................. 7 MiniSD card................ ..................... ........ 8 Turn your phone on or off ...... ............. 8 Connect the headset .......................... .. 8 Make calls ..................... .......................... . 9 Using the keypad............... ................. 9 Use the save contact option ........... 9 Use the contact s list ........................ . 9 Use the last dialled number .......... 10 Make a conference call .................. 10 Answer calls ........................... ............... 10 Answer or silence an incoming call.... ..................... ...................... ......... 10 Adjust the earpiece volume .......... 10 Answer a call with the keypad locked ........ ........................... ............... 10 Use the loudspeaker .................... .... 11 Mute phone during call......... ......... 11 Options during a call ....................... 11 Keyguard ............ ........................... ......... 11 3. Text entry ................................... 13 Standard mode ................. .................... 13 Text (Abc) ............................ ............... 13 Numbers (123) ... ...................... ......... 13 Change language ............................. 13 Punctuation and special characters.................. ..................... .... 14 Predictive text mode ...... .................... 14 Activate and deactivate ................. 14 Enter text ....................... .................... 14 Change case and mode ...................... 15 Delete text .................... ..................... .... 15 4. Messaging ............................. ..... 16 Text messages .............. ......................... 16 Text message folders and options 16 Write and send text messages ..... 17 Use a template ................... ............... 18 Read and reply to t ext messages. 18 Choose a text message option ..... 18 Use custom folders . ......................... 19 Delete text messages ............. ......... 20 iii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -9 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
Text message setting s ........ ............ 20 Multimedia messages ........................ 21 Multimedia message folders and options ......................... ..................... .. 22 Write and send mult imedia messages ................ .......................... .. 22 Read and reply to multimedia messages ................ .......................... .. 23 Choose a multimedia message option ........................... ..................... .. 24 Delete multimedia messages...... .. 26 Multimedia message settings ...... 27 Distribution lists ................................ .. 28 Create distribution list s ................. 28 Add and remove contacts ............. 28 Use distribution lists ....................... 28 Voice messages ............................. ....... 29 Save voice mailbox number .......... 29 Call and set up y our voice mail ... 29 Listen to your voice mail ........ ....... 29 Automate voice mail .......... ............ 29 Minibrowser messages ...................... 30 5. Log .......................................... .... 31 View missed calls .... ..................... ....... 31 View received calls ........................... .. 31 View dialled numbers.................. ....... 31 Time of call ............................... ............ 32 Clear log lists ................. ....................... 32 Call duration ....... ........................... ....... 32 Duration of data or fax calls..... ....... 32 Duration of minibrowser calls .. ....... 33 6. Contacts ..................................... 34 View contacts ..................... .................. 34 Search contacts ....... .......................... .. 34 Add new contacts ........ ..................... .. 35 Save a name and number ............. 35 Save a number (only).......... ............ 35 Save a contact ........... ....................... 35 Insert dialling codes ................. ....... 35 Save multiple numbers .................. 36 Save other details ............ ................ 36 Change default number . ................ 36 Send business cards ................... ..... 36 Edit contacts ................... ..................... 37 Modify contact se ttings .... ................ 38 Set up caller groups ...... ..................... 38 Set up a caller group . ..................... 38 Modify a caller group ..................... 38 Set up voice tags...... ...................... ..... 38 Assign a voice tag ...................... ..... 39 Use a voice tag ...... ...................... ..... 39 Play back a voice tag ................. ..... 39 Modify a voice tag ..... ..................... 39 Delete a voice tag ...................... ..... 40 Set up speed dial ...................... ........... 40 Assign a key to speed dial .. ........... 40 Change speed dial numbers .... ..... 40 Delete speed dial numbers ............ 40 Display phone number ............ ........... 40 Delete contacts ......................... ........... 41 Delete individual contacts ............ 41 Delete all contacts ..................... ..... 41 7. Camera............ ............................ 42 Take a photo ......................... ................ 42 Use the self-timer .......................... ..... 43 Take a sequence of photos ............... 43 Record a video ................................ ..... 44 Camera options .............. ..................... 44 Modify camera settings .... ................ 45 Image quality ......... ...................... ..... 45 Image size .... ........................... ........... 45 Video clip quality ........................ ..... 45 Video clip length ......... ..................... 45 Camera sounds ...................... ........... 45 Default title . ...................... ................ 46 Image storage ................................... 46 Default mode ............................... ..... 46 iv 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -8 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
8. Gallery ......................... ............... 47 Open a folder ........................ ................ 47 Gallery options ..... ..................... ........... 48 9. Media .......... ................................ 49 Music player .................... ...................... 49 Play music tracks ............................. 49 Music player options ....... ................ 50 Radio . ........................... ..................... ...... 51 Play radio ...................... ...................... 51 Radio options .................................... 52 Voice recorder............ ..................... ...... 52 Record speech or sound ................. 52 Recording list .............................. ...... 53 Change the storage folder .. ........... 53 Equaliser ...... ........................... ................ 53 Activate an equaliser set .... ........... 53 Create a custom equaliser set ...... 53 10. Settings .................................... 55 Profiles .............................. ...................... 55 Activate a profile.............. ................ 55 Personalise a profile .................. ...... 55 Set a timed profile ................ ........... 55 Display .............................. ...................... 56 Standby mode settings ........ ........... 56 Banner ...... ..................... ...................... 56 Screen saver................. ...................... 56 Sleep mode ............................. ........... 57 Backlight ti me-out .......................... 57 Themes .............. ........................... ........... 57 Tones ....... ..................... ........................... 57 Time and date ....... .......................... ...... 58 Clock .............. ........................... ........... 58 Date...... .......................... ...................... 58 Set the auto-update of date and time ........................... ........................... 59 Call ................ ........................... ................ 59 Anykey answer ............................ ...... 59 Automatic redial......... ...................... 59 Speed dial ................................ ........... 59 Answer when slide opened...... ...... 60 End call when slide closed ............ 60 Calling card ......................... ............... 60 International prefix ..................... .... 61 Data and fax calls ........ .................... 61 Call summary ..... ...................... ......... 62 Show call time on display ............. 62 Ringing tone for no caller ID ........ 62 Phone ............ ........................... ............... 62 Language settings ........ .................... 62 Automatic keyguard .... .................... 62 Navigation key ................... ............... 62 Memory status ... ...................... ......... 63 Security keyguard ............................ 63 DTMF tones ......... ...................... ......... 63 Start-up tone ..................... ............... 64 Help text activation ........................ 64 Voice commands ................... ............... 64 Add a voice tag .................. ............... 64 Activate a voice command ............ 65 Voice command options................. 65 Connectivity ........... ...................... ......... 65 Bluetooth connectivit y ................... 65 Infrared connectivity... .................... 68 Data cable transfer ................. ......... 69 Data and fax transfer....... ............... 70 Enhancement settings.... .................... 70 Headset ........................... .................... 71 Handsfree .................. ......................... 71 Loopset ...... ...................... .................... 71 Charger ........... ..................... ............... 71 Hearing aid ......... ........................... .... 71 Security ........ ...................... .................... 72 Phone lock...... ........................... ......... 72 Allowed number if lock active...... 72 Change lock code ......................... .... 73 Call restrictions ....................... ......... 74 Voice privacy ...... ........................... .... 74 Application settings ........................ .... 74 Network .............. ..................... ............... 75 Roaming options ..................... ......... 75 Mode.......... ...................... .................... 75 v 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -7 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
Network services ............................... .. 75 Store a feature code ....................... 75 Restore factory settings .................. .. 76 Phone details . ........................... ............ 76 11. Organiser .................................. 77 Alarm clock ......................... .................. 77 Set an alarm .......................... ............ 77 Repeat alarm......... ..................... ....... 77 Set the alarm tone .......................... 77 Set the snooze time-out.............. .. 78 Turn an alarm off ................. ............ 78 Calendar.......... ........................... ............ 78 Open calendar ...... .......................... .. 78 Calendar options ............ .................. 78 Make a calendar note .................. .. 79 View calendar notes (day view). .. 79 Options while viewing a day ........ 80 Send a calendar note.... .................. 80 Receive a note in calendar format (vCal) ................. ........................... ....... 80 Modify calendar settings ............... 80 Notes .................... ...................... ............ 81 Open notes ...... ........................... ....... 81 Make a note .......... .......................... .. 81 Send a note ........... ..................... ....... 82 Notes options ............ ....................... 82 To-do list ................... .......................... .. 82 Open to-do list ............................... .. 82 Make a to-do list note . .................. 82 Edit to-do list notes ...................... .. 83 View to-do list notes .................... .. 83 Send a to-do list note ........ ............ 83 To-do list options .......... .................. 84 Calculator .................. .......................... .. 84 Use calculator . ........................... ....... 84 Currency converter .............. ............ 85 Countdown timer .... .......................... .. 85 Set the normal timer .......... ............ 85 Change the timer ........... .................. 86 Stop the timer before the alarm sounds ............... ........................... ....... 86 Stopwatch ........................ ..................... 86 Measure split or lap time .............. 86 Save a time ................... ..................... 87 Stopwatch options .......................... 87 Operation note ............ ..................... 87 12. Mobile web .. ............................ 88 Mobile Internet access ...... ................ 88 Sign on to the mobile Internet ....... 89 Navigate the mobile Interne t .......... 89 Phone keys .................... ..................... 89 Receive a call while online ........... 89 Make an emer gency call while online ....... ........................... ................ 89 Clear the cache and disconnect .. 90 13. Extras............................. ........... 91 Games..................... ..................... ........... 91 Select games ..... ........................... ..... 91 Memory status ............ ..................... 91 Collection ........ ...................... ................ 91 Select application ............ ................ 91 Memory status ............ ..................... 91 14. PC connectivity ........................ 92 PC data transfer ............. ..................... 92 Nokia PC Suite .......................... ........... 92 15. Enhancements ............... ........... 93 16. Reference information .......... .. 95 Batteries and chargers ...................... 95 Nokia battery authentication guidelines .............................. ................ 96 17. Care and maintenance . ........... 98 vi 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -6 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
18. Additional safety information 99 Operating environment ....................... 99 Medical devices .................... ................. 99 Vehicles .................. ..................... .......... 100 Potentially explosive environments ............................. .......... 100 Emergency calls ........ ..................... ..... 101 Certification information (SAR)...... 101 MANUFACTURER âÂÂS LIMITED WARRANTY ..... .............................. 103 Index ...... .................................. ..... 106 vii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -5 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complet e user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRA FT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use th e device at a refuelling point. Don' t use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Don't use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Don't touch the an tenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIE D SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water- resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back- up copies or keep a writt en record of all important information. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES W h e n c o n n e c t i n g t o a n y other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. viii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -4 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. â About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on t he CDMA 800 and 1900, an d AMPS 800 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the feat ures in this device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights of others. When taking and using images or video clips, obey all laws and respect local customs as well as privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. â Network Services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider or network operator. Many of the features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilise ne twork services. Your service provider may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limit ations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language- dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured. This configuration may include changes in menu names, menu order and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on T CP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as Mobi le web require network support for these technologies. ix 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -3 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
â Shared memory The following features in this device may share memory: Messagi ng , Contacts , Gallery , Organiser , and Extras . Use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remaining features sharing memory. For example, saving many photos to the Gallery may use all of the available memory. Your device may display a message that t he memory is full when you try to use a shared memory feature. In this case, delete some of the information or entries stored in the shared memory features before continuing. So me of the features, such as Messaging and Contacts , may have a certain amount of memory specially allotted to them in addition to th e memory shared with other features. x 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -2 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
Wel c o me Congratulations on your purchase of the Nokia 6265 mobile phone. Your phone provides many functions which are practical for daily use, such as a hands-free loudspeaker, camera, MP3 player, video recorder, and more. Your phone can also connect to a PC, laptop, or other device using a USB data cable , Bluetooth wireless technology, or infrared. â Getting help Find your phone label If you need help, Nok ia Care Contact Centre is available for assistance. Before calling, we recommend that you write down the Electronic serial number (ESN) and have it available. The ESN is found on the type label, which is located beneath the battery on the back of the phone. See âÂÂRemove the back coverâÂÂ, p. 6 and âÂÂRemove the batteryâÂÂ, p. 7 for more information. xi 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page -1 Friday, November 18, 2005 11: 54 AM
Nokia support and contact information For the latest version of this guide, downloads, services and additional information related to your Nokia product, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/support or your local Nokia w eb site. Should you still require assistance, please refer to www.nokia-asia.com/ contactus. To check for the nearest Noki a care center location for maintenance services, you may like to vis it www.nokia-asia.com/repair. xii 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 0 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 1 1. Phone at a glance Ke ys and parts ⢠miniSD card slot (1) ⢠Earpiece (2) ⢠Display (3) ⢠Headset connector (4) â¢L E D i n d i c a t o r ( 5 ) ⢠Left selection key (6) ⢠Right selection key (7) ⢠Call key (8) ⢠End and power key (9) ⢠Infrared (10) ⢠Strap holder (11) ⢠Center selection and scroll key (12) ⢠Keypad (13) ⢠Microphone (14) ⢠Charger port (15) ⢠Pop-Port⢠connector (16) ⢠Camera key (17) ⢠Camera flash and self-portrait mirror (18) ⢠Loudspeaker (19) ⢠Volume key (20) 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 1 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 2 â Standby mode Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator and the model number of your phone , some or all of the following selection keys may appear in standby mode. The standby mode indicates your phone is idle. Signal strength (1)âÂÂMore bars indicate a stronger network signal. Menu (2)âÂÂPress the center selection key to select this option. Go to (3)âÂÂPress the left selection key to select this option. Names or network operator menu (4)â Press the right selection key to select this opt ion. Battery level (5)âÂÂA filled in battery indicates more power. â Quick keys Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator and the model number of your phone, some or all of the following scroll key shortcuts may be available in standby mode. In standby mode, the four-way scroll and center selection keys instantly take you to frequently-accessed menus: Scroll up keyâÂÂGo to the contacts list or network operator menu. Scroll right keyâÂÂView the calendar. Scroll down keyâÂÂGo to the contacts list. Scroll left keyâÂÂCreate a text message. Center selection keyâÂÂDisplays available applications or selects highlighted menus and submenus. â Indicators and icons Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator and the model number of your phone, some or all of the following indicators and icons may appear on standby mode. You have one or more text or picture messages. See âÂÂRead and reply to text messagesâÂÂ, p. 18. You have one or more voice messages. See âÂÂVoice messagesâÂÂ, p. 29 Your phone keypad is locked. See âÂÂKeyguardâÂÂ, p. 11 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 2 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 3 Your phone is set to the silent profile. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂ, p. 55 The alarm clock is on. See âÂÂAlarm clockâÂÂ, p. 77 The countdown timer is ru nning. See âÂÂCountdown timerâÂÂ, p. 85 The stopwatch timing is running in the background. See âÂÂStopwatchâÂÂ, p. 86 Integrated hands free or loudspeaker is active. The timed profile is selected. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂ, p. 55 Phone can be connected to a Bluetooth wireless technology device. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 65 , , , , or An enhancement, such as headset, handsfree, hearing aid, TTY/TTD, or loopset is active or connected. See âÂÂEnhancement settingsâÂÂ, p. 70 or Voice privacy encryption is active or inactive i n the network. Phone is roaming outside of your home network. Phone is in a digital network. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix. Phone is in a 1XRTT network. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix. â Phone menus Phone features are grouped according to function and are acces sed through the main menus. E ach main menu contains submenus and lists from which you can select or view items and personalise your phone features. You can access these menus and submenus by using the scroll method or by using a sho rtcut. Note: Some features may not be available, depending on your network. For more information, contact your wireless provider. Scroll method 1. In standby mode, select Menu using the center selection key. Scroll through the main menu using the scroll key. On the right side of the screen, a scroll bar is displayed with a tab that moves up or down as you move through the menus. This provides a visual representation of your current position in the menu st ructure. 2. When you arrive at a menu, press Select (the center selection key) to enter submenus. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 3 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 4 Select Back from the submenu level to return to the previous menu. Press the end key to return to standby mode from any menu or submenu. Main menu display You can control whether your phon e main menu is displayed as a List , Grid or Grid with labels . By default, the main menu displays in Grid with labels format. In standby mode, select Menu > Options > Main menu view > List , Grid , or Grid with labels . If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, you can also change the order of menus in your main menu. In standby mode, select Menu > Options > Organise . Highlight a menu, select Move . Use the scroll key to move the menu to a new location, select OK . You can repeat this procedure to personalise your main menu. Select Don e > Yes to save the changes. In-phone help Many features have brief descriptions (help text) that can be viewed on the display. To view these descriptions, scroll to a feature, and wait for about 15 seconds. Scroll down to view all of the description, or select Back to exit. In order to view the descriptions, you must activate help text. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Help text activation > On or Off . â Security functions The security feature protects your device from unauthorised outgoing calls or denies access to the stored information with a lock or security code. The lock code is a four-digit number, while the security co de is a five-digit number. By default, the security feature uses the lock code (defaulted to the last four d igits of your phone number), instead of the security code to protect your phone. You must enter your loc k code to access the Security menu. To access the Security menu, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 72 for more information. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 4 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Phone at a glance 5 Note: Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, the preset lock code may be 1234 or 0000 instead of the last four digits of your phone number. If none of these work, contact your wireless service provider or network operator for more help. To enter the lock code to restore the factory settings, d o the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Restore factory sett. 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . Note: Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, your phone may ask for the security code (defaulted to 12345) instead of the lock code. â Go to functions The Go to menu allows you to change the function of th e left selection key on your phone so that your most frequently used functions can be quickly accessed from the Go to menu in standby mode. Select options 1. In standby mode, select Go to > Options > Select options . 2. Scroll to the opt ions you want to add. 3. Select Mark to add an option or Unmark to remove an option. 4. Select Do ne when you have added all desired options. 5. Select Ye s to save the cha nges. 6. In standby mode, select Go to to display a list of the options that you selected in step 3. Organise functions In standby m ode, select Go to > Options > Organise . Highlight an option, and select Move . Scroll to move the option to a new location, and select OK . You can repeat this procedure to personalise your Go to menu. Select Do ne > Yes to save the changes. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 5 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Set up your phone 6 2. Set up your phone â Antenna Your device has an internal antenna. Hold the device as you would any other telephone with the a ntenna area pointed up and over your should er. Note: As with any other radio transmittin g device, do not touch the antenna unnecessarily when the device is switch ed on. C ontact with the antenna affects cal l quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna area w hen operating the device optimises antenna performance and battery life. â Battery Always switch off the power and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Avoid touching electronic components while changing the covers. Always store and use the device with the covers attached. Prolonged, continuous use of yo ur device may increase the device temperature. T he increased temperature is a normal function of this product and does not pose a safety concern for you or th e device. If the temperatu re is uncomforta ble to you, use a headset or allow your device to return to room temperature before your next call. Remove the back cover 1. With the back of the phone facing you, press down and hold the back cover latch. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 6 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Set up your phon e 7 2. Slide th e back cover toward th e bottom of the phone, lift up and remove. Remove the battery After you have removed the back cover, insert your finger into the finger grip, and lift the battery from its compartmen t. UIM (CDMA SIM) card slot Your phone has a UI M card slot buil t into the mechanics. However, the UIM is not functional in this phone model. Avoid placing anything into the UIM card slot. Replace the battery 1. Insert the battery, gold-coloured contact end first, into the battery slot. 2. Push down on the other end of the battery to snap the battery in to place. Replace the back cover 1. Set the back cover on the phone with the cover tabs aligned with the slots in the phone. 2. Press the back cover latch down and slide the back cover toward the top of phone. 3. Make sure back cover latch is secure. Charge the battery 1. Plug the charger transformer into a standard ac outlet. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 7 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Set up your phone 8 2. Insert the charger output plug into the round jack at the bottom end of the phone. If necessary, you can use a CA-44 adapter cable (1) to connect a charger and the phone. After a few seconds, the battery indicator in the display scrolls. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. â MiniSD card To insert the miniSD, complet e the following steps. 1. Slide open the phone and lift open the miniSD slot cove r. 2. Insert card firmly as shown in the illustration. The card clicks into place . To remove the miniSD card, firmly press the card until it releases from the card slot and slides out. Important: Do not rem ove the memory card while reading or writing to the card. Doing s o may cause data corruption on the card or the phone. â T urn your phone on or off 1. To turn your phone on or off, press and hold the end key for at least 3 seconds. 2. Enter the lock code, if necessary, and select OK . â Connect the headset A compatible headset, such as HS-5, may be purchased with your phone or separately as an enhancement. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 8 Frid ay, November 18 , 2005 11:54 AM
Set up your phon e 9 See âÂÂEnhancement settingsâÂÂ, p. 70 for information. 1. Plug the headse t connector into the Pop-Port⢠connector at the bottom end of your phone. appears on the display. 2. Position the heads et on your ear. With the headset connected, you can make, answer, and end calls as usual. ⢠Use the keypad to enter numbers. ⢠Press the call key to place a call. ⢠Press the end ke y to end a cal l. You can also plu g a compatible headset, such as the HS-9 Universal Headset, into the 2.5 mm headset jack on the side of your phone to allow hands-free operation. See âÂÂEnhancement settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. â Make calls Using the keypad 1. Enter the phone number, and pres s the call key. To delete a character to the left of the cursor, select Clear . 2. To end the call, press the end key. To cancel th e call attempt , select End call. Use the save contact option 1. In standby mode, enter the phone number and select Save , enter a name for the contact, and select OK . 2. To make the call, press t he call key. To return to standby mode, select Done. Use the contacts list 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your contacts. 2. Scroll to the contact you wish to dial, press the call key. To view details of the entry, select Details . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 9 Frid ay, November 18, 200 5 11:54 AM
Set up your phone 10 Use the last dialled number 1. In standby mode, press the call key to display the last 30 numbers dialle d. 2. Scroll to the number or name you wish to redial, and press the call key. Make a conference call This service is netw ork dependent. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. With the first participant on the line, select Optio ns > New call . 3. Enter the phone number of the second participant; or, t o retrieve a number from your contacts, select Search and the number you want to call. 4. Press the call key. The first participant is put on hold. 5. When the second participant picks up, press the 3 key and then the call key to connect the ca lls. 6. To end the conference call, select Options > End all calls , or press t he end key. â Answer calls Answer or silence an incoming call 1. To answer the call, press the call key or select Answer . 2. To reject the call, press the end key. Select S ilence to mute th e ringing tone. Select Dismis s or do nothing, and the call is eventually forwarded to voice mail. If your phone is set to Silent in the Profiles menu, select Dismiss , and the call is forwarde d to voice mail. Adjust the earpiece volume Press the up arrow or down arrow on the volume key located on the right side of your phone to adjust the volume of the earpiece. When adjusting the volume, a bar chart appears in the display indicating the volume level. Answer a call with the keypad locked To answer a call with th e keypad locked, simply press the call key. During the call, all features function as normal. When you end or reject the call, the keypad automatically relocks. See âÂÂKeyguardâÂÂ, p. 11 for details. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 10 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Set up your phon e 11 When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Use the loudspeaker Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use because the volume may be extremely loud. You can use your ph one loudspeaker during a call: ⢠To activate the loudspea ker, select Loudsp. ⢠To deactivate the loudspeaker, select Hands et . The loudspeaker is deact ivated automatically when a call or a call attempt ends or when cert ain enhancements are connected. Mute phone during call To mute your phone during a call, select Mu te ; to unmute the phone, select Unmute . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use during a call, are network services. Check with your wireless service provider or network operator for more information. During a call, select Options and one of the following: Loudspeaker or Handset âÂÂActivate or deactivate the louds peaker while in a call. New call âÂÂInitiate a conference call. See âÂÂMake a conference callâÂÂ, p. 10 for information. Save âÂÂSave a number entered during a call. Add to contact âÂÂAdd a number entered during a call to a contact in your list. End all calls âÂÂDisconnect from all active calls. DTM F t on e s âÂÂEnter the numbers, and select To n es to send the numbers as tones. Contacts âÂÂView the contacts list. Menu âÂÂView the phone menu. â K eyguard With keyguard, you can lock the keypad to prevent keys from being pressed accidentally. Remember to lock your phone keypad to prevent accidental calls. If th e keypad is locked, it unlocks when you receive a call. After the call, the lock automatically reactivates . When the keyguard is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 11 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Set up your phone 12 When the phone slide is open: ⢠To unlock the keypad, select Unlock , and press * within 2 seconds. ⢠To lock the keyp ad, select Menu , and press * within 2 seconds. When the phone slide is closed: ⢠To unlock the keypad, open the slide or select Unlock > OK . ⢠To lock the keyp ad, select Menu , and press * within 2 seconds. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 12 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Text entry 13 3. T ext entry You can use two methods for entering text and numbers: standard mode and predictive text mode. â Standard mode Standard mode is the only way to enter text in to the cont acts list, and to rename ca ller gr oups. Text (Abc) ⢠Press a key once to insert the first letter on the key, twice for the second letter, etc. If you pause briefly, the last letter in the display is accepted and your phone awaits the next entry. ⢠Press 0 to enter a space, thereby accepting a completed word. ⢠Press 1 as many times as n ecessary to scroll through a list of commonly used characters. ⢠Press * to display a complete list of special characters. ⢠Press and hold # to ope n Editor settings > Number mode , Dictionary on or Dictionary off , or Writing language . Numbers (123) T o s w i t c h t o 1 2 3 m o d e f r o m A b c m o d e , press and hold # at any message entry screen to bring up the E ditor settings menu list of Number mode , Dictionary on or Dictionary off , and Writing language . Select Number mode , and the device returns to th e message entry screen and switches the ABC icon in the upper left corner of the display to the 123 icon (or back). To return to Abc mode, press and hold #. Change language To change the language, do the following: 1. Press and hold #. 2. At the Editor settings menu l ist, select Writ ing language , and the new language. The phone will return to t he message entry screen, and you can compose in the new language. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 13 Fr iday, November 18, 20 05 11:54 AM
Text entry 14 Punctuation and special characters While at any text entry screen, press * to display special characte rs (press and hold * if predictive text is on). Press * again to cycle through all avai lable characters. Scroll to na vigate through the list of special characters . Once a character is highlighted, select Use to insert the character into your mess age. â Predictive text mode Predictive text input allows you to write messages q uickly using your keypad and the built-in dictionary. It is m u c h f a s t e r t h a n the standard mode method, because for each lette r, you only press the corresponding key on your keypad once. Activate and deactivate At any text entry sc reen, select and hold Options to turn predict ive text on or off depending on previous mode; or, select Opti ons > Dictionary on or Dictionary off . Press # twice to change from predictive text mode to standard mode and back. Enter text The illustration below simulates your display each time a key is pressed. For example, to write Nokia with predictive text on and with the English dictionary selected, press each of the following keys once: ⢠Press 0 to enter a space and begin writing the next word. ⢠If a displayed word is not correct, press * to see other matches. To return to the previous word in the list of matches, select Previous . ⢠If ? appears after a word, it is not in the dictionary. Select Spell to add the word to the dictionary. ⢠Press 1 to insert a period into your message. ⢠Press and hold * to display special characters. Press * again to cycle through all available characters. ⢠Press and hold the specific number key to enter a number. ⢠Press and hold # to bri ng up the Editor settings menu list of Number mode , Dictionary on or Dictionary off , and Writing language . 66 5 42 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 14 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Text entry 15 â Change case and mode Press # to switch between uppercase, lowercase, and sentence case, as well as standard and predictive text modes. Case and mode are indicated by the following icons that appear in the upper centre of the display screen. Uppercase text: standard mode is on. Lowercase text: standard mode is on. Sentence case text: standard mode is on. Only available at the beginning of a sentence. Uppercase text: predictive text is on. Lowercase text: predictive text is on. Sentence case text: predictive text is on . Only available at the beginning of a sentence. â Delete text To delete text, use one of the following options: ⢠Select Clear to backs pace the cursor and delete a character. ⢠Select and hold Clear to backspace continuously and delete characters. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 15 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 16 4. Messaging Your phone is capable of creating and receiving text, multimedia, voice and minibrowser messages. Check with your service provider to s ee what messaging is available for you. â T e xt messages Text messaging is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can send and receive text messages to compati ble phones that are also subscribed to the service. When composing text messages, check the number of ch aracters allowed in the top right co rner of the message . Using special (unicod e) characters takes up more s pace. If there are special characters in your message, the indicator may not show the message length correct ly. Before the message is sent, the phone will tell you if the message exceeds the maximum length allowed for one message. Also, you can make dist ribution l ists that c ontain phone numbers and names from your contact list. See âÂÂDistribution listsâÂÂ, p. 28 for more information. Note: When sending messages, your device may display Message sent . This is an indication tha t the message has been sent by your device to the network. Thi s is not an indication tha t the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. Text message folders and options In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages and from the following: Create message âÂÂCreate and send messages. Inbox âÂÂCheck for received text messages. Text messages are automatically stored in the Inbox when they are received. A notification appears when a message arrives in the Inbox . Outbox âÂÂCheck for outgoing text messages. Text messages are automatically stored in the Outbox as they are sent. If your service is interrupted while send ing, the text 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 16 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 17 message is stored in the Outbox until another delivery atte mpt is made. Sent items âÂÂSent text messages are stored in Sent items . Drafts âÂÂSave incomplete text me ssages in a draft. Store drafts of text messages in Drafts to be completed at a later time. Archive âÂÂSave text messages in Archive . Tem pl ate s âÂÂSelect from a collection of prewritten Te mp l at e s , when creat ing text messages. Preload ed Tem pl at es can be edited and personalised. My folders âÂÂCreate and name personal folders. Delete messages âÂÂDele te messages from a selected folder or all folders. Message settings âÂÂChange settings for reading, writing, and sending text messages. Send numeric page âÂÂSend a numeric page. Add - in s âÂÂAdd a sound, animation, or picture object. Styles âÂÂChange font appearance and size, and text alignment. Write and send text messages 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Create message . To go quickly to the Create message screen, scroll left in standby mode. 2. Compose a text message using the keypad. See âÂÂChoose a text message option âÂÂ, p. 18 for composing options. 3. Select Send to > Recently us ed , Send to number , Send to e-mail , Send to many , or Send to distribution list (if you have created one). 4. Select a number or distribution list, enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address, or se lect Search to retrieve a number or e-mail address from your contacts list; select Send . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 17 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 18 Use a template Templates are short, prewritten messages that can be retrieved and inserted into new text message s. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Create message > Options > Use template . 2. Select one of the available templates and complete the text message using the keypad. Read and reply to text messages When you receive a text message, a notification appears and the unopened letter icon ( ) is displ ayed. 1. Select Show to read the text message or Exit to dismiss the notification . Scroll to view the whole message, if necessary. When unopened messages are in your inbox, is shown in the upper centre of the display screen during standby mode as a reminder. 2. Select Reply > Empty screen , Original text , Te m pla t e , or one of the predefined answers pro vided. 3. Compose your reply with the keypad, and select Send . Choose a text message option Create message options When you create or reply to a text message, depending on the mode of text input you are using and the features supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, some or all of the following are availab le: Sending options â Mark or Unmark a message as Urgent , Delivery reports , Callback number , or Signature . Clear text âÂÂErase all text from your message. Insert contact âÂÂInsert detail from your contacts list into your messag e. Insert number âÂÂInsert a phone number or find a phone number i n the contacts list. Save âÂÂSave the message in Drafts . Exit editor âÂÂExit the message editor. Use template âÂÂInsert a predefined template . Insert smiley âÂÂInsert a smiley. Insert word or Edit word âÂÂEnter or edit the text of a ne w word that might no t appear in the predictive text dictionary. This displays only when predictive text is on. Insert symbol âÂÂInsert a special character. This displays only when predictive text is on. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 18 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 19 Writing language âÂÂTo change the language from a pre-defined list. Dictionary on or Dictionary off âÂÂTurn predictive text on or off. Matches âÂÂView matches found in the predictive text dictionary for the word you want to use. This displays only when predictive text is on. Read message optio ns When you read a text message, the following options are available: Delete âÂÂDiscard the text message. Use detail > Number , E-mail address , or Web address âÂÂSelect Save to create a new contact; select Options > A dd to contact , Send message , or Call for other options. Move âÂÂSave the message to Archive , Tem pl ate s , or a folder you have created. Divert âÂÂForward the text message to another phone number. Lock or Unlock âÂÂLock or unlock the text message. The appropriate option appears. Rename â Edit the title of the text message. Use custom folders Your phone has a folder system that saves and stores text messages. Additionally you can create custom folders. Create a custom folder To organise your messages, create custom folders, and save message s you want to keep there. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > My folders > A dd fldr . to create your initial custom folder. Select Menu > Mes saging > Te x t messages > My folders > Options > Add folder to create an additional custom folde r. 2. Enter a name for the new folder, and select OK . Rename a custom folder 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > My folders . 2. Folders you have created a ppear in the display. Scroll to the folde r you wish to rename, and select Options > Rename folder . 3. Select and hold Clear to delete the existing entry; enter a new name for the folder; select OK to confirm or Back to ex it. Delete a custom folder Only folders in My folders can be deleted. The Inbox , Outbox , Sent it ems , Drafts , Archive , and Tem pl at es folders are protected. When you delete a folder, all messages in the folder are also deleted. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 19 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 20 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > My folders . 2. Scroll to the folder you wish to delete, and select Options > Delet e folder . 3. Select Ye s to delete or No to exit. Delete text messages If your message memory is full and you have more text messages waiting at the network, blinks in standby mode. You can do the following: ⢠Read some of the unread text messages, and delete them. ⢠Delete text messages from some of your folders. Delete a single text message To delete a sing le text messag e, you need t o open it first . 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages . 2. Select the folder containing the text message you wish t o delete. 3. Select the message you wish to delete and Options > Delete . 4. Select Ye s to delete the message or No to exit. Delete all messages in a folder 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Delete messages and one of the following: All âÂÂDeletes all text mes sages in the folder. All read âÂÂDeletes only the read text messages in the folder. All unread âÂÂDeletes all unread text messages in the Inbox . 2. If you select All or All read , select Mark or Unmark to choose the folders from which to delete text messages. Select Options > Mark all to choose all folders. 3. Select Done after choosing the folders. 4. Select Ye s to delete the mes sage or No to exit. Text message settings Sending options In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Message settings > Sending options and the s etting you wish to chang e: Priority > Normal or Urgent âÂÂSelect the priority of the message. Delivery reports âÂÂSelect On to receive a note confirming delivery of a text message. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 20 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 21 Send callback number âÂÂSelect OK to send your default phone to the recipient. Signature âÂÂSelect On to append a signature to an outgoing text message. If you have not created a signature, select On ; enter a signature, and select OK . Other settings In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Text messages > Message settings > Other settings and the setting you wish to change: Message font size âÂÂSelect the desired font size for the display. Message overwriting > Sent items only , Inbox only , Sent items & Inbo x , or Off â Set your phone to automatically replace old messages in Inbox or Sent items when new one s arrive. When the message memory is full, your phone cannot send or receive any n ew messages. Save sent messages âÂÂSelect Always save or Always prompt to save sent text messag es to Sent items . Select Off to not save messages. Queue msgs. if no digital âÂÂSelect On or On prompt to store te xt messages in the Out box until they can be sent with a digital service. Select Off to no t store messages. â Multimedia messages Multimedia messaging is a net work service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operato r supports this feature, you can send and receive multimedia messages to compatible phones that are also subscribed to the service. A multimedia message can contain text, sound, a picture , or a video clip. Your phone supports multimedia messages that are up to 600 KB . If the maximum size is exceeded, the phone may not be able to receive the message. Note: Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. Depending upon your network, y ou may receive a mes sage that includes an Internet address where you can go to view the multimedia message. Pictures are scaled to fit the display area of the phone. Your phone has a multimedia message viewer for playing messages and a multimedia inbox for storing saved messages. Once you save the multimedia message, you can use the image as a screen saver or the sound as a ringing ton e. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 21 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 22 Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Multimedia messaging only s upports the following formats: ⢠Picture: JPEG, GIF, animat ed GIF, WBMP, BMP, and PNG ⢠Sound: MP3, eAAC , SP-MIDI, AMR audio, QCELP, and monophonic ringing tones ⢠Video: clips in H.264 format w ith QCIF image size You cannot receive multimedia messages if you have a call in progress, games or other applications running, or an active browsing session. Because delivery of multimedia messages can fail for a variety of reasons, do not rely solely upon them for essential communications. Multimedia message folders and options In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs . and from the following: Create message âÂÂCreate and send multimedia messages. Inbox âÂÂCheck for received multimedia messages. Multimedia messages are automatically stored in the Inbox when they are receive d. You receive a notification when a message arrives in your Inbox . Outbox âÂÂCheck for outgoing multimedia messages. Multimedia messages are automatically st ored in the Outbox as they are sent. If your service is interrupted while sending, then messages are stored in the Outbox until another delivery attempt is made. Sent items âÂÂSent multimedia messages are stored in Sent items . Saved items âÂÂSave multimedia messages for later use in Saved items . Delete messages âÂÂDelete multimedia messages from the Inbox , Outbox , Sent items , or Saved items . Message settings âÂÂChange the settings for multimedia messages. Write and send multimedia messages 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 22 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 23 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Create message . 2. Compose a message using the keypad. See âÂÂCho ose a multimedia message optionâÂÂ, p. 24 for composing options. 3. Select Send to > Recently used , To phone number , To e-mail address , To m a n y , or Distribution lists . 4. Select a number or distribution list, and enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address; or select Search to retrieve a number or e- mail address from your contacts list. 5. Select Send . The multimedia message is moved to the Out box for sending. The wireless network may limit the size of multimedia messages. If the inse rted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by multimedia messaging. It takes more t ime to send a multimedia message than to send a text message. While the multimedia message is being sent, the animated indicator is displayed and you can use other funct ions on the phone. If there is an interruption while the message is being sent, the phone automatically tries t o resend it a few times. If this fails, the message remains in the Outbox and you can try to manually resend it later. Check your Outbox for unsent messages. Note: When sending messages, your device may display the words Multimedia message sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your device to the network. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider. Messages th at you send are saved i n Sent items if the setting Save sent messages is s et to Ye s . See âÂÂMultimedia message settingsâÂÂ, p. 27. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. Read and reply to multimedia messages When a multimedia message is received, appears in the display along with the percentage display indicating the download progress. Once the message has been fully downloaded, and a notification appears in the display. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 23 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 24 1. To view the multimedia message immediately, select Show . To save the message to the inbox for later viewing, select Exit . To view a saved mes sage, select Menu > Messa ging > Multimedia msgs. > Inbox and the message you want to view. While viewing a message, select Play to play the entire message 2. Select Options > Reply or Reply to all , and compose your reply. 3. Select Send to and OK to confirm delivery number. If blinks and Multimedia memory full. View waiting message. appears, the memory for mult imedia messages is full. To view the waiting message, select Show . Before you can save the message, you need to delete some of your old messages. See âÂÂDelete multimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 26 for more information. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multim edia messa ge objec ts may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Choose a multimedia message option Create message options When you create or reply to a multimedia message, depending on the mode of text input you are using and the features supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, some or all of the follow ing options are availab le: Send to album âÂÂSend message to an online album. This is an online network service. Check with your service provider for more information. Insert > Image , Sound clip , or Vide o clip âÂÂInsert an image, sound clip, or video cli p file from your Gallery . Open the desired folder, and s elect the file and Options > Insert. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Insert > New image âÂÂOpen the camera to create a new image that you attach to the messa ge. Insert > New sound clip âÂÂOpen t he voice recorder to create a new sound clip that you attach to th e message. Insert > Slide âÂÂInsert a slide into your message. Eac h slide can contai n text, business card, calendar note, one image, and one sound clip. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 24 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 25 Insert > Business card âÂÂInsert contact as a business card. Insert > Calendar note âÂÂInsert a calendar note. Delete > Image , S ound clip , or Video clip âÂÂDelete an image, sound clip , or video clip file from your message. Only appears when your message has a file attachment. Delete > Slide âÂÂDelete the current slide from your message. Edit subject âÂÂEdit the subject head ing. Clear text âÂÂErases all text from the current slide in your message. Preview âÂÂPreview the message or slide presentation before send ing it. Select Stop to end the preview. Select Play to start the preview again or Back to return to the lis t of options. Previous slide âÂÂMove to the previous slide. Option only appears if there is a previous slide. Next slide âÂÂMove to the next sli de. Option only appears if there is next slide. Slide list âÂÂShow s a list of all slides. Select the slide you wish to edit. Slide timing â Set the timing interval for each slide. By default, each slide appears for 12 seconds. Place text first or Place text last âÂÂMove text to the top or bottom of the slide. By defaul t, the tex t appears at the bottom or last. Save âÂÂSaves the message to Saved items . More options > Insert contact âÂÂIns ert a name from your contacts list into your message. More options > Insert number âÂÂInse rt a phone number or find a phone number in the contacts list. More options > Mes sage details âÂÂShow the details of your multimedia message. Exit editor âÂÂExit the message editor. Insert smiley âÂÂInsert a smiley. Insert word or Edit word âÂÂEnter or edit the text of a new word that might not appear in the predi ctive text dictionary. This appears only when predictive text is on. Insert symbol âÂÂInsert a special character. This appears only when predictive text is on. Writing language âÂÂChoose the language you want to use. Dictionary on or Dict ionary off âÂÂTurn predictive text on or off. Matches âÂÂView matches found in the predictive text dictionary for the word you want to use. This appears only when predictive text is on. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 25 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 26 Read message options When you read a multimedia message, the following options are available: Set con trast âÂÂAdjust the contrast of an image. This option is only available when viewing an image. Details âÂÂDisplays the details of a highlighted file attachment. Save image , Save sound clip , or Save video clip âÂÂSave the corresponding file to the Gallery . Images, sound clips, and video clips must be open before you can save them. Save link â Save the corresponding Web link. This appears only when a Web link is highlighted. View text âÂÂView only the text included in the message. Acti va te i mag e , A ctivate tone , or Activate video clip âÂÂView or listen to the corresponding file. Open business card âÂÂOpen an attached busine ss card . Open calendar note âÂÂOpen an attached calendar note. Delete âÂÂDelete the message you are viewing. Reply or Reply to all âÂÂEnter a reply and send it to the original sender and any other recipients of the message . Use detail âÂÂUse a corresponding number or e-mail address. The number or e-mail address must be highlighted Send to number , Send to e-mail , or Send to many âÂÂForward the message to a phone number, to an e-mail address, or to multiple recipients. Album âÂÂForward the message to an online album. This is an online network service. Check with your service provider for more information. Message details âÂÂView the senderâÂÂs name and phone number, the mess age center used, reception date and time, message size and ty pe. Delete multimedia messages If your message memory is full and you have more multimedia messages waiting at the network, blinks in standby mode. You can do the following: ⢠Read some of the unread multimedia messages, and delete them. ⢠Delete multimedia messages from some of your folders. Delete a single multimedia message To delete a single multimedia message, you need to open it first. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. 2. Select the folder containin g the multimedia message you wish to delete. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 26 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 27 3. Select the message you wish to delete and Options > Delete . 4. Select Ye s to delete or No to exit. Delete all multimedia messages in a folder 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Delete messages > Inbox , Outbox , Sent items , or Saved it ems . 2. Select Ye s to delete th e all messages in the folder or No to exit. Multimedia message settings Save sent messages You can save the multimedia messages that you send to th e Sent ite ms folder. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Message settings > Save sent messages > No or Yes . Delivery reports You can request delivery reports to inform you if a message is delivered. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Message settings > Delivery reports > On or Off Scale image down You can request for images to be automatically scale d down. In standby m ode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Message settings > Scale ima ge down > Ye s or No . Default slide timing You can set t he default time in mm:ss for the slides of a multimedia message. In standby m ode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs. > Message settings > Default slide timing , enter a slide time, and select OK . Allow multimedia reception Before you can use the multimedia message feature, you must specify whether you want to receive message at all times or only if you are in the service providerâÂÂs home system. This is a network service. Check with your service provider for more info rmation. The default setting of the multimedia message service is generally on. The appearance of a multimedia message may vary depending on the receiving device. You can choose to receive all messages, to block all mes sages, or to receive messages only when you are in the service providerâÂÂs home netwo rk. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 27 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 28 In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Multimedia msgs . > Messa ge settin gs > Allow multimedia recept. and one of the following: Ye s âÂÂAllow all incoming messages. In home network âÂÂAllow incoming messages only if you are in the service providerâÂÂs ho me system. This is a network service. Check with your service provider for more information. No âÂÂBlock all incoming messages. â Distribution lists Distribution lists allow you to send text or multimedia messages to a designated group of people. Create distribution lists 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Distributi on lists > New list . If you cre ate a second distributi on list, select Menu > Messaging > Distribution lists > Options > Create new list . 2. Enter a name for the list, and select OK . 3. To add a contact to this list, select Add new , and add the contacts one by one . A distribution list only contains pho ne numbers of recipients. Add and remove contacts To add contacts, select Menu > Messaging > Distribution lists > the list > Add new . Add the contacts one by one. To remove contacts, select Menu > Messaging > Distribution lists > the list > Options > remove contact name. Use distribution lists 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Distribution lists . 2. Lists you create are displayed. Scroll to the list you wish to modify; select Options and one of the following: Create new list âÂÂCreate a new distribution list. Rename list âÂÂRename the distribution list. Clear list âÂÂClear the distribution list of all current contacts. Delete list âÂÂDele te the distribution list. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 28 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 29 â V oice messages If you subscribe to voice mail, your wireless provider will furnish you with a voice mailbox number. You need to save this number to your phone to use voice mail. When you receive a voice message, your phone will beep, displaying a message, or both. If you receive more than one message, your phone show s the number of message s received . Save voice mailbox number Your wireless provider may have already saved your voice mailbox number to your phone. If so, the number will appear in the display in step 2. Select OK to leave the number unchanged. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Voice messages > V oice mailbox number . 2. If the number is not displayed or incorrect, enter your voice mailbox area code and number. 3. Select OK . Call and set up your voice mail 1. After you save the voice mailbox, in standby mode, press and hold 1. 2. When you connect to voice mail and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the automated instructions to s et up your voice mail. Listen to your voice mail After you set up voice mail, you can dial the number in one of four ways: ⢠Dial the number using the keypad. ⢠Press and hold 1. ⢠Select Lis ten if there is a notification on the display. ⢠In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > V oice messa ges > Listen to voice messages . When you connect and the prerecorded greeting begins, follow the automated instructions to listen to your voice messages. Automate voice mail Voice mail services vary by service provider. The following instructions are examples of common operations. Please check with your service provider for specific instructions for using your voice mail service. Write down number and process 1. Write down your voice mailbox number. 2. Call and check your v oice mail as you normally would. 3. Write down your interaction with the recorded prompts step-by-step. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 29 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Messaging 30 Note that each voice mail service may vary. Your steps may resemble the following: Dial 2145551212, pause 5 seconds, press 1, pause 2 seconds, press 1234, and press *. â Minibrowser messages Minibrowser messaging is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can check for e-mail messages using the minibrowser. In standby mode, select Menu > Messaging > Minibrowser msgs. > Connect . See âÂÂMobile webâÂÂ, p. 88 for more information on using your phone to access web pages. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 30 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Log 31 5. Log Log stores information about the last 30 missed, 30 received, or 30 dialled calls. It also adds the total duration of all calls. When the number of calls exceed the maximum, the most recent call replaces the oldes t. Whether viewing missed, received, or dialled calls, the menu options are the same: Time of call âÂÂDisplay the date and time of the call. Send message âÂÂSend a message to the number. Use number âÂÂEdit th e number and associate a name with the number. Delete âÂÂClear the number from memory. Call âÂÂCall the number. â View missed calls The missed calls feature does not function when your phone is switched off. Missed calls are calls that were never answered. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Missed calls ; if a missed call notification appears, select List . 2. Scroll to a name or number, select Options , and a menu option. â View received calls Received calls are calls that have been answered. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Received calls . 2. Scroll to a name or numbe r, select Options , and a menu option. â View dialled numbers Dialled calls are numbers you have previously dialled from your phone: 1. In standby mode, press the call key; or select Menu > Log > Dialled numbers . 2. Scroll to a name or number, select Options , and a menu option. â Time of call You can make or receive up to five calls to or from the same number and view the time each call oc curred. Your clo ck must be set for this fe ature to work accurately. 1. While viewing a missed, received, or dialled call, select Options > Time of call . 2. Scroll down to view t he most recent call times from this number. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 31 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Log 32 3. Select Back to re turn to the opt ions list. â Clear log lists You can delete any missed, dialled , or received calls from phone memory. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Clear log lists > All call lists , Missed calls , Received calls , Dialled numbers , or Message recipients . â Call duration Note: The actual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on call plans, network features, rounding off for billing, taxes and so forth. You can view the duration of your calls. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Call duration and one of the following optio ns: Last call duration âÂÂCheck the time of your last call. Dialled calls' duration âÂÂCheck the combined time of calls you dialled for either Home or Roaming . Received calls' duration âÂÂCheck the combined time of calls you received for either Home or Roaming . All calls' duration âÂÂCheck the combined time of all calls. Life timer âÂÂCheck the total airtime minutes logged on your phone. Clear timers âÂÂEnter your security code, and select OK to clear all timers on your phone. Note: Some timers, including the life timer, may be reset during service or software upgrades. â Duration of data or fax calls Data/fax calls are a network se rvice. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can view the size or duration of sent or received data and fax calls. Note: The actual inv oice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on call plans, network features, rounding off for billing, taxes and so forth. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Data/fax calls and one of the following options: Last sent data/fax âÂÂView the siz e (KB) of the last sent data or fax call. Last received data/fax âÂÂView the size (KB) of the last received data or fax call. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 32 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Log 33 All sent data/fax âÂÂView the si ze (KB) of all sent data and fax calls. All received data/fax âÂÂView the size (KB) of all received data and fax calls. Last data/faxâÂÂs duration âÂÂView the duration time of the last data or fax call. All data/fax callsâ duration âÂÂView t he duration time of all calls. Clear all data/fax registers â Select Ye s to clear all data and fax registers. â Duration of minibrowser calls Minibrowser is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix, for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can view the size or duration of sent or received data from the minibrowser. Note: The act ual invoice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on call plans, network features, rounding off for billing, taxes and so forth. In standby mode, select Menu > Log > Minibrowser calls and one of the following options: Last sent browser data âÂÂView the size (KB) of the last send browser data. Last rcvd . brow ser data âÂÂView the size (KB) of the last received data. All sent browser data âÂÂView the size (KB) of all sent browser data. All received browser data âÂÂView the size (KB) of all received browser data. Last browser session âÂÂView the duration time of the last browser session. All browser sessions âÂÂView the duration time of all browser sessions. Clear all browser logs âÂÂSelect OK > Ye s to clear all browser logs. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 33 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 34 6. Contacts The contacts list can hold up to 500 contacts with multiple numbers and text notes for each contact. The amount of numbers and text entries that you can save may v ary, depending on length and the total number o f entries in the contacts list. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts and from the following optio ns: Names âÂÂList of contacts currently on your phone. Settings âÂÂChange your contact settin gs. Caller groups âÂÂAssign contacts to caller groups. Voice tags âÂÂAssign voice commands to phone numbers. Speed dial âÂÂAssign specific keys to phone numbers. My numbe r âÂÂShows t he current number assigned to the phone. Delete all contacts âÂÂDelete all contacts on your phone. To quickly access your contacts scroll up or down while in standby mode. â View contacts In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Names or scroll down to see your current list of cont acts. While viewing your contact list, you can select Det ails for the contact information or Options and one of the following: Search âÂÂSearch your contacts. Add new contact âÂÂAdd a new contact. Delete cont act âÂÂDelete the highlighte d contact. To make a call, highlight a contact, and select Call . â Search contacts In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Names > Options > Sear ch . Enter the first cha racter of the contact name, and highlight the contact you wish to view. Note: If the right s election key on your phone is Names , you can select Names > Options > Search in the standby mode. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 34 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 35 â Add new contacts Save a name and number 1. In standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save. 2. Select Save . 3. Enter the name, and select OK > Done . When you enter a num ber, you can select Options > Insert pause (âÂÂpâÂÂ) to insert a pause code or Op tions > Insert wait (âÂÂwâÂÂ) to insert a wait code. Save a number (only) 1. In standby mode, enter the phone number you wish to save. 2. Select and hold Options . Save a contact 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Names > Options > Add n e w . 2. Enter the name, and select OK . 3. Enter the phone number, and select OK . Insert dialling codes You can insert special characters called dialling codes into phone numbers such as voice mail, and save the number to a speed dial location. Dialling codes inst ruct the receiving system to pause, wait, bypass, or accept the numbers that follow them in the dialling st ring. You can automate voice mail with dialling codes. For more information, see âÂÂAutomate voice mailâÂÂ, p. 29. Press * repeatedly to cycle through dialling codes. When the desired code appears in the display, p ause briefly and the code is inserted into the dialling string. The following dialling codes are available: Dialling code Indicates... * Bypasses a se t of instruc- tions. Causes the international access code to be replaced by . p Pauses for 2.5 seconds be - fore sending any numbers that follow. w Waits for you to press the call key before sending the numbers or codes that fol- low. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 35 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 36 Save multiple numbers You can save different types of phone numbers per contact. The first number you save for any en try is automa tically set as the default, but th e default number can always be changed. 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Select the contact to which you want to add a phone number. 3. Select Details > Options > Add detai l > Num ber > General , Mobile , Home , Office , or Fax . 4. Enter the phone number, and select OK . If you want to ch ange the number type, highlight the number and select Details > Options > Change type > General , M obile , Home , Office , or Fax . Save other details To add an address or note an existing contact, do the following: 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Scroll to the contact to whic h you want to add an address or note. 3. Select Details > Options > Add detai l > E-mail address , Web address , Postal address , or Note . 4. Enter the text for the note or address, and select OK . To associate an image or tone to an existing contact, do the following: 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Scroll to the contact to which you want to add an address or note. 3. Select Details > Options > Add detail > Image to s a v e a n i m a g e from the Gallery or to save a new image with the came ra function, or Ton e to select the default tone or a new tone from the Gallery. Change default number To change the default number for an existing contact. 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Select the contact for which you want to change the default number and Details . 3. Highlight the new defaul t number, and select Options > Set as default . Send business cards You can send a busi ness card to a compatible phone or other handheld device. 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Select the contact to which y ou want sent as a bu siness card and Details . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 36 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 37 3. Select the number to use and Options > Send business card > Via multimedia , Via text message , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth . 4. Select Default number or All details . 5. Enter the number for your recipient, or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts; select OK . â Edit contacts 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Highligh t a contact, select Details . 3. Highlight the name, number, detail, or image you wish to edi t and select Options . The type of detail you highlight determines your selection of options. Choose one of the following options: View âÂÂView the phone number of the contact. Add detail > Name âÂÂAdd a name to the contact. This option appears only if the contact does not have a name. Add d e ta i l > Number > General , Mobile , Home , Office , or Fa x âÂÂAdd a number to the contact. Add d e ta i l > E-mail address , We b address , Postal address , Note , Image , or To ne âÂÂAdd an additional detail t o the contac t. Edit name , Edit number , or Edit detail âÂÂEdit the detail of the contact. Change image âÂÂChange the image associated with the contact. Delete âÂÂSelect Delete number to delete a detail or Delete contact to delete the entire contact ent ry from your contacts. Send message âÂÂCreate and send a text message or multimedia message to the contac t. Use number âÂÂDisplay the phone number, ready for use. Set as default âÂÂMake the number the default for the contact. Change type > General , Mobile , Home , Office , or Fa x âÂÂChange the number type. Add voice tag âÂÂAdd a voice tag to the contact. Save to gallery âÂÂSave the image to your Gallery . Send business card > Via infrared , Via text message , Vi a Bluetooth , or Via multimedia âÂÂSend the co ntact as a business card to anoth er phone. Caller groups > Select No group to remove the contact from a caller group or Family , VIP , Friends , Business , or Other to add the contact to an existing caller group. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 37 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 38 Speed dial âÂÂAssign the con tact to your speed dial list. â Modify contact settings In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Settin gs and the setting you wish to change: Scrolling view âÂÂSelect Normal name list , Name and number , Large name li st , or Name and image view. Memory status âÂÂView the amount of phone memory used as well as the amount of phone memory availab le. â Set up caller groups You can add contacts to any of five caller groups, and assign a unique ringing tone or graphic to that group. This enables you to identify callers from the group by their unique ringing tone or graphic. Set up a caller group 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Highlight a contact, select Details . 3. Highlight a number, select Options > Caller groups and the select the caller group you wish to add the number to. Modify a caller group In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Caller groups > Family , VIP , Friends , Business , or Other and one of the following options: Group name âÂÂRename the group to your preference. Group ringing tone âÂÂSet the ring ing tone for the group. Group logo âÂÂTurn the graphic for the caller group on or off. Group members âÂÂAdd or remove members from the caller group. â Set up voice tags Before using voice tags, note the following: ⢠Voice tags are not language- dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. ⢠You must say the name exactly as you said it when you recorded it. ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags, and use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names, and avoid similar names for different numbers. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 38 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 39 Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances. Assign a voice tag To use voice dialling, you must first assign a voice tag to a number. 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Highligh t a contact, select Details . 3. Highlight the number you want to assign a voice tag, select Options > Add voice tag . 4. Select Start , then speak clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you want to cance l the recording. 5. After you finish speaking, the phone automatically st ops recording, saves, and replays the voice tag. appears next to the phone numbers which have voice tags assigned. Use a voice tag 1. In standby mode, select and hold Names . 2. When you hear several beeps and Speak now appears, release the key. 3. Pronounce the voice tag clearly into the microphone. When the phone finds t he voice tag, a notification appears, and the phone automatically dials the number. If the phone does not locate a number or recognise the voice t ag, No match found appears. Play back a voice tag 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > V oice tags . 2. Select the voice tag you want to play back, and select Playback . Modify a voice tag 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > V oice tags . 2. Select the voice tag you want to change, and select Change . 3. Select Sta rt , and speak clearly into the microphone. The phone repeats your voice tag, and Voice tag changed appears. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 39 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 40 Delete a voice tag 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Voice tags . 2. Select the voice tag you want to delete, and select Delete . Delete voice tag? appears. 3. Select Ye s to erase the voice tag. â Set up speed dial You can associate any entry in your contacts with a key from 2âÂÂ9; to dial those entries, press and hol d the assigned key. Assign a key to speed dial 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Speed dial . 2. Scroll to any empty slot, and select Ass ign . 3. Enter the number (including the area code), and select OK ; or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts. 4. If necessary, enter the cont act name for the number, and select OK . If Speed dial is off, the phone displays a prompt asking if you want to activate Speed dial . Select Ye s to activa te Speed dial . Change speed dial numbers 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Speed dial . 2. Scroll to the Speed dial entry you wish to change, and select Options > Change . 3. Enter the new number, or select Search to retrieve a number from your contacts; select OK . 4. If necessary, enter t he contact name for the number, and select OK to change the key assignment. Delete speed dial numbers 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Speed dial . 2. Scroll to the Speed dial location you wish to delete. 3. Select Options > Delete > Ye s to delete the key assign ment. â Display phone number In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > My number to display your phone number. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 40 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Contacts 41 â Delete contacts Delete individual contacts 1. In standby mode, scroll down to display your list of contacts. 2. Highligh t a contact, and select Options > Delete contact > Yes or No . Delete all contacts 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Contacts > Del ete all contacts > Ye s . 2. Enter your lock code, and press OK . See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 72 for more information. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 41 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 42 7. Camera You can take photos and record video clips with the built-in came ra and adjust its settings. The camera lens is on the back of the phone. The camera produces photos in JPEG format and video clips in H.263 (QCIF) format. After you take a picture or video, you can attach it to a multimedia message, send it as a multimedia message, save it as a wallpaper, save it to a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite software, and upload it to a Web address with the content image uploader. When you attach a picture to a con tact, the picture is dis played when the contact calls you. If there is not enough memory to take a new photo, delete old photos or other files in the Gallery . This device supports an image capture resolution of 320 x 240 pixel s on the display. The image resolutions in these materials may appear different. Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. When the phone is in camera mode, the interface will switch from portrait to landscape. Turn the phone on its side to use the camera and view the available options. â T ake a photo You can use you r camera to tak e photographs. To take a picture, complete the following steps: 1. In standby mode, press the camera key or select Menu > Camera . This activates the camera. The display is now landscape. If you are in Video mode, select Options > Still image to switch to Still image mode. 2. To take a picture, press the camera key or select Capture to take the 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 42 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 43 photo. Press the volume key displayed here or the scroll keys to zoom in and out. When taking a photo, a shutter sound is heard. The phone saves the photo in the Images folder of the Gallery menu. The saved photo is shown on the display. 3. Select Back to take another photo, Delete to erase the photo, or Options and one of the foll owing: Zoom âÂÂZoom in on a captured photo; scroll to navigate around the photo. New image âÂÂReturns to ca mera mode. Send > Via mult imedia , Via Bluetooth , or V ia infrared âÂÂSend a photo to a compatible phone or PC. Attach to contact âÂÂAttach th e photo to a contact. Rename â Edit the name of the photo. Open Gallery âÂÂOpen the Gallery , where photos are saved. Set contrast âÂÂScroll to adjust the contrast of the photo . Edit image âÂÂOpens the photo for editing. Use image > Set as wallpaper , Set as screen saver , or Set as contact image âÂÂUse the photo. Details > View details of the photo. â Use the self-timer You can use the camera self-timer to delay taking a photo for approximately 10 seconds . 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Sel f-timer on . 2. Select Sta rt . A beep sounds while the self-timer is running, and beeps faster when the camera is about to capture the photo. After the time-out, the camera takes the photo and saves it to the Images folder of the Gallery menu. â T ake a sequence of photos You can use the camera image sequence opti on to take up to four photos in quick succession. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Img. sequence on . 2. Select Sequence . The camera take five photos in sequence. After the photos are taken, the camera sa ves them to a folder in the Images folder of the Gallery menu. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 43 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 44 â Record a video 1. In standby mode, press the camera key or select Menu > Camera . This activates the camera. The display is now landscape. If you are in Still image mode, select Options > Video t o s w i t c h t o Video mode. 2. Select Record to begin recording the video clip. While you are recording, the indicator and the remaining recording time are shown at the top of the display. 3. Select Pa u s e to pause the recording, Continue to res ume the recording, or Stop to s top the recording. The phone saves the video clip in the Video clips folder of the Gallery menu. 4. Select Back to take another video clip, Pl ay to play the video clip, or Options and one of the following. Delete âÂÂDelete the video clip from the Gallery . New video cli p âÂÂReturns to video mode. Send > Via multimedia , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend the video clip to a compatible phone or PC. Rename âÂÂEdit the nam e of the video clip. Open Gallery âÂÂOpens the Gallery , where video clips are saved. Mute audio or Unmute audio âÂÂTurn the video clip sound on or off. Set contrast âÂÂUse the scroll keys to adjust the contrast of the video clip. Use video clip > Set as screen saver âÂÂUse the video clip. Details âÂÂView details of the video clip. â Camera options In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Op tions and from the following: Still image or Video âÂÂChoose camera mode to take a picture or record a video. Mute audio or Unmute audio âÂÂTurn the sound on or off for the video clip. Option only appears when camera is in video mode. Night mode on or Night mode off â Switches the camera night mode on and off. Flash on or Flash off âÂÂTurns the camera flash on and off. Self-timer on or Self-timer off âÂÂTurns the self-timer on and off. This option only appears in still image mode. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 44 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 45 Img. sequence on or Img. s equence off âÂÂTurns image seque ncing on or off. The pictures are then saved to the gallery. This option only appears in still image mode. View pr evious âÂÂView the previous photo or video taken. This option only appears when a photo has been taken during that session. Open Gallery âÂÂOpen the Gallery to view saved images, videos, and recordings. Settings âÂÂChange the settings for the phone camera. â Modify camera settings Image quality Define file compression when saving the image. High-quality images have less file compression and provide t he best image quality, but take more memory. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Image quality > High , Normal , or Basic . Image size Set the size of an image when taking a picture. A larger image has better resolution, but takes more memory. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Image size and a resolution size. Video clip quality Define file compression when saving the video clip. High-quality video clips have less file compression and provide the best video quality, b ut take more memory. In standby m ode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Set tings > Video clip quali ty > High , Medium , or Low . Video clip length You can change the maximum length of a video clip. The maximum size of a video clip can be 600 KB. A recording will stop once it reaches the maximum size, even if the maximum length is set longer. Only video clips that are default length or shorter can be sent in a multim edia mes sage. In standby m ode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Set tings > Video clip lengt h > Default or Maximum . Camera sounds You can turn off the camera sounds that happen when a picture is taken or video recorded. In standby m ode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Set tings > Camera sounds > On or Off . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 45 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Camera 46 Default title You can change the default title your phone uses to assign na mes to new photos and video clips. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Default title > Automatic or My title . If you select My title , enter new text upon which filenames the phone creates are based on. Image storage You can change where your ph one camera stores files. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Image and video storage > Default folder or Other folder . If you sele ct Other folder , locate th e new your new locatio n. This setting in only available when you are using a miniSD card. Default mode You can change the default mode of your phone camera. In standby mode, select Menu > Camera > Options > Settings > Default mode > Standard photo or Video . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 46 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Gallery 47 8. Gallery You can save pictures, video clips, recordings, music files, and ringing tones to folders in the Gallery , and add new folders to the ones already there. You can download images and t ones using multimedia messaging, text messaging, mobile Internet sites, or Nokia PC Suite. Your phone supports a digital rights management system to protect content that you have acquired. A piece of content, such as a ringing tone, can be protected and associated with certain usage rules, for example, the number of usage times or a certain usage period. The rules are defined in the content ac tivation key tha t can be delivered with the content or separately, depending on t he service provider. You may be able to update these activation ke ys. Always check the delivery terms of any content and activation key before acquiring them, as they may be subject to a fee. Copyright protection may p revent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your phone has about 20 MB of memory for storing files in the Gallery . This memory is not shared with other functions, such as contacts. If the phone displays a message that the memory is full, delete some exi sting files before proceeding. You can also use a compatible miniSD card to add memory. Warning: Use only compatible miniSD cards with this device. Other memory cards, such as multimedia cards, do not fit in the miniSD card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. â Open a folder In standby m ode, select Menu > Gallery to view the folder system. The phone folder s ystem includes: Memory card âÂÂIf there is a miniSD card in the phone, the miniSD name is displayed below the signal strength indicator. You ca n access your m iniSD card folder system. Images âÂÂBy default, camera photos are saved to th is folder. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 47 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Gallery 48 Video clips âÂÂBy default, camera video clips are saved to this folder. Music files âÂÂBy default, music files are saved to this fold er. Themes âÂÂA set of themes i ncluded wit h your phone is stored here. Graphics âÂÂA set of graphics included with your phone is stored here. Ton es âÂÂA set of ring tones included with your phone is stored here. Recordings âÂÂBy default, voice recordings are saved to this folder. Received files âÂÂFiles sent direct ly to your phone are stored here. Your foldersâÂÂFolders you create appear after the preset folders. To open a folder, highlight the folder and select Open . Once you open the folder list and highlight a file, you can access the file or the options associated with that specific file type. â Gallery options In standby mode, select Menu > Gallery > Options and one of the following: Rename memory card âÂÂEnter a name for the miniSD card. This option is available only for the miniSD card folder. Format memory card âÂÂDelete all files and folders stored on the miniSD card. This option is avail able only for the miniSD card folder. Delete folder âÂÂDelete a folder yo u have created. You cannot delete a preset folder. Move âÂÂMove the selected folder into another folder. After selecting Move , highlight another folder, and select Move to . Y ou cannot move a preset folder. Rename folder âÂÂRename a folder you have created. You cannot rename a preset folder. Details âÂÂShow the name, size, and d ate of creation of the selected folder. Type of view âÂÂChoose whether to view the folders as a list with details, list only or a grid. Sort âÂÂSort the contents of the selected folder by name, date, format, or size. Add folder âÂÂCreate a new folder. Memory status âÂÂCheck the available memory for the phone handset or the miniSD card. Activation key list âÂÂView the list of available activation keys. You can delete activation keys if desired. Mark or Mark all âÂÂAllows you to mark Gallery folders to be moved into another folder. This function only applies to folders you have created. Other options appear depending on the type of files that exist in the folders. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 48 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 49 9. Media â Music player Your phone includes a Music player for listening to music or other tracks in MP3 or AAC format. You can transfer files from a PC to your p hone using a USB data cable, an infrared, or a Bluetooth wireless technology connection. To transfer musi c tracks from a compatible PC and ma nage the music tracks and track lists, see th e instructions for the Nokia Audio Manager application in the Nokia PC Suite online help. See âÂÂD ata cable transferâÂÂ, p. 69; âÂÂInfrared connectivityâÂÂ, p. 68; and â Bluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 65 for more information on transferring music tracks to your phone. Music files stored in the Music files folder of the Gallery are automatically detected and added to the default playlist. Music files stored else where, such as in a miniSD card folder, must be defined in a track list before you can listen to th em. You can listen to the sound files through a compatible headset or the phone loudspeaker. You can make or answer a call while using Music player . During a call, the playback is paused. When the call end s, Music player restarts where it left off. Play music tracks In standby m ode, select Menu > Media > Music player . If there are no music files in the Music files folder, you can select anothe r folder before entering th e Music player . The details of the first track on the defau lt track list are shown. To use the graphical keys, , , , or , on the di splay, scroll left or right to the desired key, and select it. Play trackâÂÂTo play a track, selec t . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 49 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 50 Adjust volumeâ To adjust the volume level, use ei ther the volume key or the left and right selection keys. Stop trackâÂÂTo stop the playing, select or press and hold the end key. Skip tracksâÂÂTo skip to the beginning of the next track, select . To skip to the beginning of the previous track, select twice. Rewind or fast forwardâÂÂTo rewind the current track, select and hold . To fast forward the current track, select and hold . Releas e the key at the positio n you want . Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Music player options Select Music files or other music folder and Options and one of the following: Play via Bluetooth âÂÂMake a connection to an audio en hancement using Bluetooth connectivity. Track list âÂÂView all the tracks available on a track list. To play a track, highlight the track, and select Play . Select Options > Send to send the music file. Select Options > Refresh all tracks to refresh the track list (for example, after adding new tracks to the list). Select Options > Change track list to change the track list that is shown whe n you open the Music player menu, if several track lists are availa ble in the phone. Play options âÂÂSelect Random to p lay the tracks on the track list in random order. Select Repeat to play the current track or the entire track list repeatedly. Media equaliser âÂÂThe equaliser enhances the sound qua lity when using a headset (only) with the Music player by amplifying or attenuating frequency bands. There are five preset equaliser settings ( Normal , Po p , Rock , Jazz , and Classical ) and two customisable settings. Headset or Loudspeaker âÂÂWith the headset at tached you can toggle between listening to the Music player through a headset or the loudspeaker. When using a compatible headset, you can skip to the next track by pressing the headset key quickly. To stop the playing, press and hold the headset key. Warning: When using the stereo headset your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the stereo headset where it can endanger your safety. Send > Via multimedia , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend music files to a compatible device. Memory status âÂÂView used and free memory of Handset and Memory card . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 50 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 51 â Radio Your phone has an FM rad io that also functions as an alarm clock radi o. You can listen to the FM radio on your phone through the hands-free speaker enhancem ent or with a headset. For FM stereo, connect a compatible music stand or ste reo headset to th e connector on the bottom of the phone or connect a 2.5 mm headset to the headset port on the side of the phone. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device for the FM radio to function properly. The quality of a radio broadcast depends on coverage of the radio station in that particular area. Warning: L i s t e n t o m u s i c a t a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Play radio In standby mode, with an enhancement or he adset conn ected, select Menu > Media > Radio . The Radio turns on and plays the last radio frequency you used. To use the graphical keys, , , , or , on the display, scroll left or right to the desired key, and select it. Channel searchâÂÂTo start a channel search, select and hold or . To change the radio frequency in 0.1 MHz steps, briefly press or . Switch offâÂÂPress and hold the end key to turn off the radio. Adjust volumeâÂÂTo adjust the volume level, use the volume key. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 51 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 52 Save channelâÂÂTo save the channel to a memory location 1 to 9, press and hold the corresponding number key. To save a channel to a memory loca tion 10 to 20, briefly press 1 or 2, then press and hold the desired number. Enter the name of the channel, select OK . Select channelâÂÂTo select to a channel, select or . To go directly t o a saved channel, briefly press the corresponding number key. When an application using a browser connection is sending or receiving data, it may interfere with the radio. When you place or receive a call, the radio automati cally mutes. Once the call is ended, the radio switches back on. Radio options In standby mode, select Menu > Media > Radio . The radio turns on. Select Options and one of the following: Tur n o ff âÂÂTurn off the radio. Save sta tion âÂÂEnt er a name for the channel, and select OK . Select one of 20 locations to save the channel locatio n. Statio ns âÂÂSelect from the list of current saved channels on your phone. Use Options > Delete st ation to clear channels or Options > Rename to rename channels. Mono output or Stereo output âÂÂListen to the radio in monaural mode or in stereo (default). Stereo output is availabl e through a ster eo enhancement. Headset or Loudspeaker âÂÂWith the headset atta ched, listen to th e radio through a headset or the loudspeaker. Set frequenc y âÂÂManually en ter the frequency of a known radio station, and select OK . You can also press * to set a frequency. â V oice recorder Voice recorder allows you to make a short (up to 3 minutes) recording and save it to the Recordings folder or another folder in the Gallery . The recorder cannot be used when a data call is active. Record speech or sound 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Media > Voice recorder . 2. To start the recording, select record virtual button. 3. Hold the phone in the normal position near your ear, and record your message. 4. When you are finished recording, select stop virtual button. The recording is given a default name and saved to the Recordings list . The default locati on of the Recordings 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 52 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 53 list is the Recordings folder in the Gallery . After you have made a recording you can select Play last recorded to replay the recording and Send last recorded > Via infrared , Via Blue tooth , or Via multimedia to send the reco rding to a compatible phone. These o ptions are only available during the current recording session. Recording list 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Media > V oice recorder > Options > Recordings list > Record ings . 2. Naviga te through the Recordings folder, and select a recording you want to modify. 3. Select Open to open and play the recording or Options to use the Gallery options. Change the storage folder You can select a folder other than Recordings as the default folder to store your vo ice recording s. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Media > V oice recorder > Options > Select memory . 2. Highlight the new location, and select Set . â Equaliser The equaliser enhances the sound quality when using Music player by amplifying or attenuating frequency bands. There are five preset equaliser settings ( Normal , Po p , Rock , Jazz , and Classical ) and two customisable settings. Activate an equaliser set In standby m ode, select Menu > Media > Equaliser , and highlight the desired equaliser setting, and select Act i va t e . Select Options > V iew to display the equaliser se ttings. Create a custom equaliser set 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Media > Equaliser . 2. Highlight a customisable setti ng, and select Options > Edit . The selected set appears in the display with the bar on the far left highlighted. The bars adjust frequencies, from the lowest (the far left bar) to the highest (the far right bar). The higher the indicator on a particular bar, the more that frequency is amplified. 3. To adjust the lowest frequency, scroll up and down to move the indicator on the bar. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 53 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Media 54 4. To adjust other frequencies, scroll right and left to move to the other bars. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust th e setting for each frequency. 6. When you are finished, selec t Save . 7. To rename t he setting, select Options > Rename , enter a new name, and select OK . 8. To activate the setting, select Acti va te . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 54 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 55 10 . S e t t i n g s Use the Settings menu to change profiles, display settings, themes, tone settings, time and date se ttings, call settings, phone settings, voice commands, connectivity, enhancem ents, s ecurity se ttings, application settings, network settings, network services, restore factory settings, and view phone details. â Profiles Profiles define how your phone rea cts when you receive a call or message, how your keypad sounds when you press a key, and more. Ringing options, keypad tones, and other settings fo r each of the available profiles can be left at their default s etting, or personalised to suit your needs. The following profiles are available: General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , and two customisable profiles. Profiles are also available for enhancements su ch as a headset and car kit. See âÂÂEnhancement settingsâÂÂ, p. 70. Activate a profile In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Profiles > General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , or custom pr ofile > Act i va t e . Personalise a profile To modify a profile, do the following: In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Profiles > General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , or custom pr ofile > P ersonalise > and a profile option. You can not rename the General profile. To personalise profile tones, see âÂÂTonesâÂÂ, p. 57. Set a timed profile Timed profiles can be used to prevent missed calls. For example, suppose you attend an event that requires your phone be set to Silent be fore the event starts, but you forget to return it to General until long after the event. A timed pro file can prevent missed calls by returning your phone to the default profile at a time you specify. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 55 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 56 To set a timed profile, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Profiles > General , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , or custom profile > Timed . 2. Enter the time for the profile to expire, and select OK . Timed profiles can be set up to 24 hours in advance. â Display Standby mode settings Wallpaper You can set either an Image or a folder of images ( Slide set ) as wallpaper for the phone display. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Standby mode settin gs > Wallpaper and one of the following: On âÂÂActive wallpaper on your phone. Off âÂÂDeactivate wallpaper on your phone. Image âÂÂChoose an image from the Gallery for wallpaper. Select Open to brows e the Graphics folder. Select the image of your choice for the wallpaper. Slide set âÂÂSelect a folder in your Gallery to act as a slide show for the wallpa per. Font colour You can set font colour of your phone when in standby mode. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Standby mode settings > Standby font color . 2. Scroll to select a colour from the colour grid. Banner Banner is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can choose whether the display shows the operator lo go or a custom banner, when the ph one is in standby mode. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Banner > Default or Pe r s o na li se . Screen saver You can choose a screen saver for the phone display. In standby mode, select Menu > Se ttings > Disp lay > Screen saver and one of the following: On âÂÂActivate screen saver on your phone. Off âÂÂDeactivate screen saver on your phone. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 56 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 57 Screen savers > Image , Slide set , Video Clip , Digital clock , or Open Camera â Choose an image, video clip or other option to act as your screen saver. Time-out > Modify the idle time before the screen saver activates. Note: Power saver is automatically activated following screen saver time- out to optimise battery life. Sleep mode Sleep mode is a power-saving feature that turns the phone display off during inactivity. You can activate the sleep mode feature on your phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Sleep mode > On or Off . When Sleep mode is activated the display is completely blank. A blinking LED indicator shows that the phone is still on. Backlight time-out You can contr ol the time-out of the backlight on your phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Display > Backlight time- out > Default (15 seconds). To ch ange the time-out between 15 seconds and 4 minut es, select Personalise . â Themes Themes allows you to personalise the ringtone, screensaver and backgroun d on your phone. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Themes > Select theme and a theme of your choice. â Ton e s You can adjust the ringing volume, keypad tones, and more for the active profile. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Ton es and one of the following: Incoming call alert âÂÂSelect how your phone will alert you when there is an incoming call: Ringing , As ce nd in g , Ring once , Beep once , Off . Ringing tone âÂÂSelect Open Gallery > Ton e s to select the ringing tone for incoming calls. Ringing volume âÂÂUse the left and right scroll keys to set the volume o f your ringing tone. Vibrating alert âÂÂActivate the vibrating call alert. Select On to activate the vibrating alert. Message alert tone â Select the alert tone for incoming messages: Off , Standard , Special , Beep once , Long & loud , Ringing tone . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 57 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 58 Keypad tones âÂÂUse the left and right scroll keys to set the volume of your keypad tones (or turn them off). Warn in g t one s âÂÂTurn warning and confirmation tones on or off Alert for âÂÂSet the phone to alert only when a member of a selected caller group calls. See âÂÂSet up caller groupsâÂÂ, p. 38 for more information. â Time and date Clock Show or hide the clock In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Clock > Sho w clock or Hide clock . Set the time 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and dat e > Clock > Set the time . 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm forma t), and select OK . 3. Select am or pm (t his option displays only when 12-hour format is in use ). Change the time zone In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Clock > Time zone and you r time zone bas ed on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), plus or minus hours in your time zone. For example, GMT-8 is US Pacific time in Los Angeles, CA. GMT does not include Daylight savings time, so add or subtract accordingly. Change the format In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Clock > Time format > 24 -hour or 12-h our . Date Show or hide the date In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Date > Show date or Hide date . Set the date In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Date > Set the date , enter the date, and select OK . Change the format 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Date > Date format and the format of your choice. 2. With Date on the display, select Date separator , and the separator of your choice. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 58 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 59 Set the auto-update of date and time Auto-update is a network service. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can allow the digital network to set the clock, which is useful when you are out of your home area (for example, when you have traveled to another network or time zone). In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Time and date > Auto- update of date/time > On , Con firm first , or Off . If you use the Auto-update of date/ time option while outside your digital network, you may be prompted to enter the time manually. Network ti me will replace the time and date when you reenter your digital network. If your battery has been removed or has discharged outside the digit al network, you may be prompted to enter the time ma nually (once the battery is replaced or recharged, and you are still outside of the digital network). â Call Anykey answer When Anykey answer is on, briefly press any key except the right selection or end key to answer a call. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Anykey answer > On or Off . Automatic re dial Occasionally, your network may experience heavy traffic, resulting in a fast busy signal whe n you dial. With automatic redial activated , your phone redials the number, and notifies you once the network is available. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Automatic redial > On or Off . Speed dial To activ ate or deacti vate Speed dial , do the following: In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On or Off . For more information on Speed dialling , see âÂÂSet up speed dialâÂÂ, p. 40. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 59 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 60 Answer when slide opened Set your phone to answer a call when you open the slide. If the setting is off, you must press the call key after you open the slide. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > An sw . when s lide opened > On or Off . End call when slide closed Set your phone to end a call when you close the slide. If the setting is off, you must press the end key after you close the slide. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > End call when slide closed > On or Off . Calling card If you use a calling card for long distance calls, you can save t he calling card numbers in your phone. Your phone can store up to four calling cards. Save information 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Calling card . 2. Enter your security code or lock code, and select OK . (See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 72.) 3. Scroll to one of the four me mory locations, and select Options > Edit > Dialling sequence . 4. Select one of the following sequence types: Access phone card âÂÂDial the access number, th e phone number, the card number and PIN, if required. Access card phon e âÂÂDial the access number, th e card number and PIN, if required, then pho ne number. Prefix phone card âÂÂDial the prefix (numbers that must precede the phone number) and phone number you want to dial, then card number and PIN, if required. 5. Enter the required information (access number or prefix and card number), and select OK to confirm your entries. 6. Select Card name . 7. Enter the card name, and select OK . Contact your calling card co mpany for more information. Make calls After you have saved your calling card information in your phone, you can make a call using your calling card. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Calling card . 2. Enter your security code or lock code, and select OK . 3. Scroll to the calling card of your choice, and select OK . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 60 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 61 4. Pres s the end key to return to standby mode; then enter the phone number, including any prefix (such as 0 or 1) that your calling card may require when you make a calling card call. See your calling card for instructions. 5. Press and hold the call key for a few seconds until Card call is displayed. 6. When you hear th e tone or system message, select OK . International prefix If supported by your service provider, you can store an international prefix into your phone. When you enter at the beginning of a phone number, your phone automatically inserts the international prefix that you have stored. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > International prefix . 2. Enter the international prefix (for example, 0011), and select OK . 3. In standby mode, enter and the phone number you want to call. For example, 3546789. The phone dials the international prefix you have stored in your phone and the phone numbe r you have entered. For example, the phone dials 0011354789 . Data and fax calls Receive data or fax calls Data/fax calls is a network s ervice. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, you can set up the phone to send or receive data or fax calls when a terminal, such as a PDA or PC, is connected. For better performance during data calls, place the phone on a stationary surface. Do not move the phone by holding it in your hand during a data call. For more information on connectivity, refer to the PC/PDA Connectivity Guide. The PC/PDA Co nnectivit y Guide can be downloaded from the Nokia website at www.nokia-asia.com. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Data/fax ca lls > Incoming data/fax call and one of the following: General âÂÂThe phone receives incoming calls as usual. Data calls only âÂÂThe phone receives only data calls. Fax calls only âÂÂThe phone receives only fax calls. 2. Select Da ta calls only or Fax calls only . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 61 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 62 3. When you are finished receiving the fax or data call, re peat steps 1 and 2, and select Ge neral . View data transfer You can view the transmission speed when sending or receiving data or fax calls. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Dat a/fax calls > Data rate display > Graphic or Off . Call summary Your phone can display the time spent on a call when you hang up. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Call summary > On or Off . Show call time on display Your phone can display the call time during the phone call. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Sho w call time on displ ay > On or Off . Ringing tone for no caller ID You can select a different ringing tone for calls received with no caller ID. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Call > Ring. tone for no caller ID > On or Off . See âÂÂPersonalise a profileâÂÂ, p. 55 for more information on selecting a ringing tone. â Phone Language settings Phone language allows you set the language of the display text seen on the phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Se ttings > Phone > Phone language and the language of your choice. Automatic keyguard Automatic keyguard allows you to automatically lock your phone after a defined time. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Automatic keyguard > On or Off . Navigation key If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, you can set the feat ures that are a ctivated when you press the scroll key. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Navigation key . 2. Highlight the scroll up, s croll down, scroll right, or scroll left arrow; select Change . 3. Select a function to assign to the action. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 62 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 63 Memory status You can view the memory usage of your phone or miniSD card. If you do not have a miniSD card, you will only see the options for your phone memory. Some or all of the following options are available on your phone. Phone memory In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Memory status > Phone and one of the following possible options. Free memory âÂÂShow the amo unt of phone memory available for file storage. Contacts âÂÂShow th e amount o f phone memory currently used for Contacts. Text messages âÂÂShow the amo unt of phone memory currently used for Text messsages. Gallery âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for Gallery. Organiser âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for Organiser. Applications âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for Applications. Multimedia msgs. âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for Multimedia messages. Card memory In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Memory status > Card name and one of the following: Free memory âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory available for file storage. Used memory âÂÂShow the amount of phone memory currently used for file storage. Size âÂÂShow the total amount of phone memory you can use for file storage. Security keyguard If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, Automatic keyguar d controls whether the security keyguard is on or off. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Automatic keyguar d > On or Off . DTMF tones DTM F t on e s are th e tones that sound when you press the keys on your phone keypad. Yo u can use DT MF t on e s for many automated dial-up services such as banking and airlines or for entering your voice mailbox number and password. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 63 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 64 DTM F t on e s are sent during an active call. You can send them manually from your phone keypad, or send them automatically by savi ng them in your phone. Set type In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > DT M F t o ne s > Manual D TMF tones and one of the following: Continuo us âÂÂThe tone sounds for as long as you press and hold a key. Fixed âÂÂUsed to se nd tones of the duration you specify in the DTM F to ne length option. Off âÂÂUsed to turn off tones. No tones are sent when you press a key. Set length You can also spec ify DTMF tone length when using the Fixed option. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > DT M F t o ne s > DTMF tone length > Short (0.1 seconds) or Long (0.5 seconds). Start-up tone If the Start-up tone is activate d, the tone sounds when you turn on your phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Sett ings > Phone > Start-up tone > On or Off . Help text activation Your phone displays brief descriptio ns for most menu items. When you arrive at a feature or menu, pause for about 15 seconds and wait for the help text to display. Scroll to page through the full help text, if necessary. The default setting for help text is on. However, you can turn help text on or off. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Phone > Help text activation > On or Off . â V oice commands You can set up t o five Voice commands , which allow hands-free operation of certain phone features. Add a voice tag Before using Vo ice commands , you must first add a voice tag to the phone function. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > V oice commands . 2. Select a function option you wish to tag, and select Ad d . 3. Select Start , and speak the voice tag clearly into the microphone. Do not select Quit unless you wa nt to cancel the recording. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 64 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 65 The phone replays then saves the recorded tag. appears next to the function option for which you add a voice tag. Activate a voice command After you have associated a voice command tag with a phone function, you can issue a command by speaking the voice command tag. 1. In standby mode, select and hold Names . 2. When Speak now appears, pronounce the vo ice tag clearly into the microphone. When the phone finds the voice command tag, Found: appears, and the phone plays the recognised voice command tag through the earpiece. The function you reques ted is activated. Voice command options You can modify voice c ommand tags. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > V oice commands , highlight the voice command tag, and select one of the following options: Play âÂÂListen to the voi ce command tag. Options > Change âÂÂChange the voice command tag. Options > Delete âÂÂErase the voice command tag. â Connectivity You can connect th e phone to a compatible device using an IR connection. You can also connec t the phone to a compatible PC using IR or a USB data cable; and use the phone as a modem to enable connectivity from the PC. For more information, see the Nokia PC Suite online help. Nokia PC Suite and all related software can be downloaded from the U.S. Mobile Phone products section of www.nokia- asia.com/ pcsuite. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protect ion agains t harmful software. Bluetooth connectivity Bluetooth technology connectivity enables cost-free wirele ss connections between electronic devices and can be used to send and receive images, texts, gallery files, voice recordings, video clips, notes, business cards, and calendar notes. It can also be used to connect wirelessly to products that use Bluetooth wireless technology, such as computers. Yo u can synchronise your phone and your PC using Bluetooth connectivity. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 65 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 66 Since devices with Bluetooth connectivity communicate using radio waves, your phone and the other device do not nee d to be in direct line-of -sigh t. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 30 feet (10 meters ) of each other. The conn ection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. The Bluetooth wirele ss technology application whether used actively or in the backgroun d, consumes the battery and reduces the operating time of the phone. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 1.2 and supports the following profiles: ⢠Object push profile (OPP) ⢠File transfer profile (FTP) ⢠Dial-up networking profile (DUN) ⢠Generic object exchange profile (GOEP) ⢠Headset profile (HSP) ⢠Hands-free profile (HFP) ⢠Generic access profile (GAP) ⢠Serial port profile (SPP) To ensure interope rability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the m anufacturer s of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technol ogy in some locations. Check with your loca l authorities or service provider. If you want more information on this function, vi sit the Bluet ooth Technology organisation website: https://www.bluetooth.org/. Pairing You can set up a perma nent association (pairing) between your phone and another device with Bluetooth technology. So me devices may require pairing before data transfer can take place. To pair with a device, you and the owner of the other device must agree on a pass code of 1âÂÂ16 numeric characters. Th e first time you try to connect the devices, you must each enter the same p ass code. Once the devices are paired, you will not need t o use the pass code again, so there is no need to remember it. Paired devices are placed in your paired device list. You can view the list even when Bluetooth connectivity is not active or when the devices in the list are not available for connection. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluetooth > P aired devices > Options and one of the following: 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 66 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 67 Assign short name âÂÂGive a nickname to the selected device (visible to you only). Auto-conn. withou t conf. â Select No if you want the phone to connect to the selected device automatically or Ye s if you want the phone to ask for your permission first. Delete pairing â Delete the pairing to the selected device. P air new device âÂÂSearch for active devices with Bluetooth technology within range, scroll to the desired device, and select Pai r to establis h pairing with that device. Do not accept Bluetooth connectiv ity from sou rces you do not trust. Bluetooth connectivity settings You can define how your phone is shown to other devices with Bluetooth connectivity. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluet ooth > Bluetooth settings and one of the following: My phone's visibility âÂÂSelect Shown to all to show the phone to all other devices with Bluetooth connectivity or Hidden to show the phone only to the paired devices. Operating the phone in hidden mode is a safer way to avoid malicious software. My phone's name âÂÂChange your phone name that is seen by other users. Set up a connection 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluetooth > On . The active Bluetooth technology connection is indicated by at the top of the display. 2. Select Search fo r audio enhancements to search for compatible devices with Bluetooth connectivity. The list of found devices appears in the display. 3. Select the desired device. 4. If required, enter the Bluetooth connectivity pass code of the device to pair with the device. Your phone connects to the device. You can start data transfer. To view the device yo u are connected to, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Act i ve device . To deactivate Bluetooth connectivity, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Off . Deactivation of the Bluetooth technology connection will not affect other functions of the phone. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 67 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 68 Send dat a Instead of using the Connectivity menu, you can use other phon e menus to send various types of data to other device s with Bl ueto oth connectivity. For example, you can send a video clip from the Video clips folder of the Gallery menu. See the appropriate sections of the user guide for information about sending different types of data. Receive a data transfer When a Bluetooth technology connection is active in your phone, you can receive notes, business cards, video clips, and other types of data transfers from another device with Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a data transfer, an alarm sounds, and a message appears in standby mode. To view the transferred item immediately from the standby mode, select Show . To view the item at a later time, select Exit . Depending on the nature of the item, it is saved in the appropriate menu in your phone. For example, a business card would be saved in Contacts , and a calendar note would be saved in Calendar . Infrared connectivity You can set up the phone to receive data through its infrared (IR) port. To use an IR connection, transmiss ion and reception must be to or from an IR compatible phone or device. Warning : Do not point the IR beam at anyoneâÂÂs eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Send and receive data 1. Ensure th at the IR ports of the sending and receiving devices are pointing at each other and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices in an IR connection is from 7.6 centimeters (3 inches) to 0.9 mete rs (3 feet). 2. To activate IR in your phone, select Menu > Settings > Connectivity > Infrared . 3. The user of the other device should activate IR as well. If data transfer i s not started within 2 minut es after the activation of the I R port, the connection is cancelled and must be restarted. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 68 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 69 Connection indicator ⢠When is shown continuously, the IR connection is activated and your phone is ready to send or receive data using its IR port. ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to the other device or a connection has been lost. Data cable transfer You can transfer data from your phone to a compatible PC, or from a compatible PC to your phone using a CA-53 USB data cable. Important: Di sconnect the USB data cable from the phone to make a call. Enable default mode connection Connect to your PC in Default mode to transfer phone data and files between your phone and PC using NokiaâÂÂs PC Suite. 1. Connect your PC and your phone with a CA-53 USB data cable. A notification appears on the display asking which mode you want to select. 2. Select OK > Default mode . A notification appears on the display stating a connection is active. You can now use PC Suit e to connect to your phone. Enable data storage connection Connect to your PC in Data storage mode to transfer music, photo, and video files to the phone miniSD card, and from the phone miniSD to your PC with Windows Explorer. 1. Connect your PC and your phone with a CA-53 USB data ca ble. A notification appears on the display that asking which mode you want to select. 2. Select OK > Dat a storage . The notification Data storage mode displays while the ph one is in data transfer mode. 3. Open Windows Explorer. Your phone miniSD card will appear as a local drive (named by Nokia 6265), and with a drive letter assigned to it. 4. Click on the folders to display a window that shows the contents of the folder on the phone miniSD card. 5. Open a second instance o f Windows Explorer and display on your PC, the contents of the folder where you have stored the MP3 files, photo files, or video files. 6. Select on your PC the files t hat you wish to transfer t o the phone. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 69 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 70 7. Drag and drop the files from the second window in to the first window and place them in a folder. 8. The files are transferred to the phone and can be played by the Music player , or accessed by the Media player . If you select a file o r files that require more memory than can fit on the available phone memory, you w ill get an error note. Deselect some of your selected files until the required memory is less than or equal to the available memory on your phone. Disable data storage connection 1. To disable the USB data cable, double-click the green arrow on the task bar at the bottom of your PC screen. A window pops up that shows Unplug or Eject Hardware. 2. Click on USB Device in th e Hardware devices window. A popup window shows St op a Hardware device. 3. Highlight USB device, and click OK. The popup window Safe to Remo ve Hardware is shown with the message âÂÂThe âÂÂUSB Deviceâ device can now be safely removed from the syste mâÂÂ. 4. Click OK. Important: To ensure that all memory card operations are completed in a controlled way, do not unplug the connectivity cable until Windows notifies you that it is safe to do so. Uncontrolled completion or unexpected disruptions of the memory card operations may cause the memory card and th e information stored on it to become corrupted. A corrupted memory card may have to be formatted before it can be used again. When a memory card is formatted, all information on the card is permanently lost. Data and fax transfer You can make data and fax tran sfers during a phone call. For more information, see âÂÂData and fax callsâÂÂ, p. 61. â Enhancement settings The Enhancem ent settings menu displays the hearing aid compliant option by default, and shows other options only if the phone is or has been connected to a compatible enhancement type. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 70 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 71 Headset In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Headset and one of the follow ing: Default profile âÂÂChoose the profile you wish to be automati cally ac tivated when a headset is connected. Automatic answer âÂÂCalls are answered automatic ally after on e ring when a headset is connected. Select On or Off . Note: Automatic answe r will only be active whilst â General â profile is active Handsfree In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Handsfree and one of the follow ing: Default profile âÂÂChoose the profile you wish to be automati cally ac tivated when a car kit is co nnected. Automatic answer âÂÂCalls are answered automatic ally after on e ring when a car kit is connected. Select On or Off . Note: Automatic answe r will only be active whilst â General â profile is active Lights âÂÂChoose to keep t he phone lights always on, or t o shut off automatic ally after seve ral seconds. Select On or Automatic . Loopset A LPS-4 Loopset accessory al lows your device to optimise sound quality when coupled with a hearing aid that is set to T-coil mode. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Loopset > Use Loopset > Yes or No . If the Loopset is connected and recognised through the Pop-Port⢠connector, the phone automatically uses the Loopset . Charger In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Charger and one of the following: Default profile âÂÂSelect the profil e you want to automa tically activate when your phone is connected to the charge r. Lights â Select On or Automatic to keep the phone lights al ways on or to shut off automatically after several seconds. Hearing aid To optimise sound qualit y, you can set your phone to couple to a T-coil- equipped hearing aid. In standby m ode, select Menu > Settings > Enhancements > Hearing aid > T-coil hearing aid mode . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 71 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 72 Select O n to activate the HAC. Verify that the hearing aid is set to T- coil mode, and hold the p hone against the ear. Only activate the T-coil hearing aid mode when using your device with a hearing aid or it may impact the audio performance of the device. â Security To access Security for the first time, you must enter the preset lock code. By default, the preset lock code is the last four digits of your phone number. Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, the preset lock code may be a four digit number such as 1234 or 0000. If none of these work, contact your wireless service provider or networ k operator for help. Phone l ock The phone lock feature protects your phone from unauthorised outgoing calls or unauthorised access to information stored in the phone. When phone lock is activated, Phone locked is displayed each time you turn your phone on. When the device is locked, you can st ill call the official emergency number programmed into your phone. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . 3. Select Phone lock and one of the following: Off âÂÂImmediately turns off the phone lock feature. Lock now âÂÂImmediately turns on the phone lock feature. On power-up âÂÂTurns on the phone lock feature the next time you turn the phone on. If you select Lock now , you must enter your lock code before the phone will function normally. After the lock code is accepted, your phone functions normally. Call not allowed appears if you attempt to place a call w hile your phone is locked. To answer a call with phone lock on, select Ans wer , or press the call key. Allowed number if lock active With phone lock on, the only outgoing calls you can make are to the emergency number programmed into your phone (for example, 000, 111, or 911) and the numbers stored in the Allowed no. if lock active location. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 72 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 73 3. Select Allowed no. if lock active > Ass i gn . 4. Enter the phone number, or s elect Search to retrieve the number from the phone book; select OK . To place a call to an allowed number when the phone is locked, ente r the allowed number and press the call key. Change lock code When changing the lock code, avoid using codes similar to emergency numbers such as 0 00, 111, or 911 to prevent accidental dialling of an emergency number. By default, the preset lock code is the last four digits of your phone number. Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, the preset lock code may be a four-digit number such as 123 4 or 0000. If none of these work, contact your wireless service provider or network operator for help. If you enter an incorrect lock code five times in a row, your phone may ask you for the security code. By default, the security code is the five- digit number, 12345. Note: If you en ter the wrong lock code five times in succession, your phone will not accept your current lock code for 5 minutes. This occurs even if when you power down the phone between incorrect attempts. To change the phone lock code, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Securi ty . 2. Enter the current lock code, and select OK . 3. Select Change lock code . 4. Enter the new lock code (only 4 characters), and select OK . 5. Enter the new lock code ag ain for verification, and select OK . When you change your lock code, make sure to reme mber it. If nece ssary, write it down and store it in a safe place away from your phon e. Avoid entering a lock code similar to emergency numbers to prevent accidental emergency calls. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 73 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 74 Call restrictions Call restrictions allows you to block or allow numbers for incoming or outgoing calls. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . 3. Select Call restrictions and the type of calls you wish to restrict: Restrict outgoing calls âÂÂSet restrictions on making calls. Restrict incoming calls âÂÂSet restrictions on receiving calls. 4. Select whether to block or allow numbers: Blocked numbers âÂÂSet numbers that are blocked on incoming calls, allowing all other numbers. When a number is blocked, the call is sent to voice mail. Allowed numbers âÂÂSet numbers that are allowed, blocking all other numbers. 5. To modify the restriction list, select from the following options: Select âÂÂAdd numbers to the restriction list. Add restriction âÂÂAdd a restriction to a number (unavailable if memory is full). Edit âÂÂEdit a restriction on a number. Delete âÂÂDelete a number from restriction list. When calls are restricted, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Voice privacy V oice privacy is a network service, and its function depends on a variety of services. Contact your service provider for more information. If your wireless service provider or network operator supports this feature, the voice privacy feature protects the privacy of your current phone conversation from other callers placing phone calls on your same network. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Security . 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . 3. Select V oice privacy > On or Off . â Application settings The Applicat ion settings menu changes game and application settings. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Application settings and one of the following: Application sounds > On or Off âÂÂPlay sounds during an application. Application lights > Application defined or Default âÂÂPlay lights during an application. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 74 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 75 Application vibration > On or Off â Vibrate phone during an appl ication. â Network The menu options you see in your phone are based on your service providerâÂÂs network. The network determines which options act ually appear in the phon e menu. Check with your service provider for more information. The Network menu personalises the way your phone chooses a network in which to operate while you are within or outside of your primary or home system. Your phone is set to s earch for the most cost-effective network. If your phone cannot find a preferred network, it selects a network automatically based on the option you choose in the Network menu. Roaming options If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, you can select which roaming option you wish to use. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Ro aming options and the following: Automatic âÂÂThe phone automatically searches for service in another digital network. If one is not found, the phone uses analog service. The roaming rate applies when not in the home service area. Mode If supported by your wireless service provider or network operator, you can choose whether your phone will use digital or analog service. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network > Mode and the following. Digital only âÂÂYou can make and receive calls on a digital network only. â Network services The following features are network services. See also âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix. Store a feature code Network feature setting allows you to activate netw ork services in your phone using feature codes received from your service provider. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Network feature setting . 2. Enter the feature code from your service provider (for example, *900 for activating Divert if busy ), and select OK . 3. Select Ca ll divert . 4. Scroll to the type of forwarding that matches the feature code you entered (for example, Divert if busy ), select Activate . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 75 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Settings 76 The activated feature code is now stored in your phone, and you are returned to the Feature code: prompt. Continue entering ot her feature codes (for example, *900 to cancel Divert if busy ), or press the end k ey to return to standby mode. When you enter a network feature code successfully the feature becomes visible in the Network services menu. Call divert Call divert tells your network to redirect incoming calls to another number. Cal l divert is a network service and may not work the same in all networks, so contact your wireless provider for availability and information. To activate, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Network services > Call divert and the following: Divert all calls âÂÂForward all calls to the number you specify. 2. Select Ac ti v at e . 3. Enter the number to wh ich your calls, data, or other information are forwarded, and select OK . To cancel, in standby mode, s elect Menu > Sett ings > Network services > Call divert > Cancel all call diverting . Cancel all call diverting may affect your ability to receive voice mail messages. Contact your wireless provider for specific details. â Restore factory settings You can reset som e of the menu settings to their original values. Data that you have entered or downloaded is not deleted (for e xample, entries in your contacts list are not affected). 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Settings > Restore factory sett. 2. Enter the lock code, and select OK . Note: Depe nding on your wireless service provider or network operator, your device may request the security code (defaulted to 12345) instead of the lock code. â Phone details You can view the current details of your phone. In standby mode, select Menu > Se ttings > Phone details and one of the following options: User details âÂÂShow the phoneâÂÂs current number details. V ersion details âÂÂShow the hardware, software and browser version information for the phone. System details âÂÂShow the digital network the phone is on. Icon details âÂÂShow the icons used. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 76 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 77 11 . O r g a n i s e r Your phone c ontains feat ures to help organise your everyd ay life, including an alarm clock, calendar, calculator, countdown timer, and stopw atch. â Alarm clock Set an alarm The alarm clock is based on the phone clock. It sounds an alert any time you specify and even works if the phone is turned off. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm time . 2. Enter the ti me for the alarm in hh:mm format, and select OK . 3. Select am or pm if 12-hour clock format is on. Alarm on appears briefly in the display, and appears in standby mode. If you need to reset the alarm select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm time > On from standby mode. To turn off the alarm, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm time > Off from standby mode. Repeat alarm You can set the alarm to repeat every day or only on certain days of the week. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Repeat alarm > On . 2. Check the day or days of the week you wish to repeat the alarm, and select Mark . Select Unmark to remove a day. 3. Select Do ne when you have added all desired days. If you need to revise the days for a repeated alarm, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Repeat alarm > Repetition days from standby mode. If you need to stop a repeated alarm, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Re peat alarm > Off in standby mode. Set the alarm tone You can set which tone is played when the alarm sounds. In standby m ode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm tone and one of the following: 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 77 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 78 Standard âÂÂSelect the default alarm. Radio âÂÂSelect the radio as the alarm. Open Gallery âÂÂSelect a tone from the Gallery as the alarm. Set the snooze time-out You can set the Snooze time-out for the alarm. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > S nooze time-out and choose a snooze time. When the alarm sounds, your phone beeps, vibrates (if vibrate alert is on in the currently active profile), and lig hts up. With the phone on, sele ct Stop to shut the alarm off or Snooze . If you sele ct Snooze , the alarm stops for 10 minutes. If you do not press a key, the alarm stops (snoozes) for t he Snooze time- out , then sounds again. If the alarm time is reached while t he phone is switched off, the phone switches itself on and starts sound ing the alarm tone. If you s elect Stop , the device asks whether yo u want to activate the phone for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Ye s to make and receive calls. D o not select Ye s when wireless phone use may cause interfe rence or dan ger. Turn an alarm off In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Alarm clock > Alarm time > Off . â Calendar The calendar keeps track of reminders, calls you need to make, meetings, memos, and birthdays. It can even sound an alarm for any of these events. Monthly view provides an overview of the selected mont h and weeks. You can also jump to a specific date. Any days or dates that appear in bold font contain calendar notes such as a meeting or reminder. A short summary of notes for the day appears at the bottom of the screen. Open calendar In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar . Scroll to move the cursor in the calendar view. Calendar options In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar > Options and one of the following: Week view âÂÂView your calendar by weeks. To return to month view select Back , while in the Week view . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 78 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 79 Make a note âÂÂCreate a note on the selected date. Go to date âÂÂJump to a specific d ate. Enter the date (for example, 15/07/ 2005), and select OK . Go to today âÂÂJump to th e current date. Settings âÂÂModify the calendar settings. Go to to-do list âÂÂGo directly to your to- do list. Delete all notes âÂÂDelete all calendar notes. Make a calendar note You can make a calen dar note for a specific date. You can choose from five types of notes. Your phone asks for further information depending on which note you select. You can also set an alarm for your note. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar . 2. Highligh t the date for which y ou want to make a note. Scroll or select Options > Go to date . 3. Select Options > Make a note and one of the following: Meeting âÂÂEnter the subject, and select Sav e . Enter a location, and select Sav e . Enter a start and end time. Choose an alarm option. Call âÂÂEnter the phon e number, and select Sav e . Enter a name, and select Save . Ent er a time. Choose an alarm option. You can also select Options > Search to search your cont acts. Birthday âÂÂEnter the personâÂÂs name, and select Save . Enter the year of birth. Choose an alarm option. Memo âÂÂEnter the subjec t, and select Save . E nter a start and end date. Choose an alarm opt ion. Reminder âÂÂEnter the reminder, and select Save . C hoose an alarm option. View calendar notes (day view) You can view the calendar notes for a day. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar . 2. Scroll to the date you want to view or select Options > Go to dat e . Days w ith notes appear in bold type. 3. Select View to see the l ist of notes for that day. To view a specific note, highlight the note, and select View again. If there are no notes for that date, select Add to create a ne w calendar note . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 79 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 80 Options while viewing a day When viewing a dayâÂÂs list of note, you can highlight a note, select Options and one of the following: Make a note âÂÂCreate a new note for the selected date. Delete âÂÂDelete the note. Edit âÂÂEdit the note. Use detail âÂÂUse a detail contained in the note. Mov e âÂÂMove the note to another date on your calendar. Repeat âÂÂEnable the note to recur on a regular basis (daily, weekly, biweekly, monthly, and yearly). Repeat is not available for Birthday note. Go to date âÂÂJump to another date on your calendar. Go to today âÂÂReturn to the curren t date. Send not e > Send as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend a calendar note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, in a multimedia message, or directly to another device. Copy âÂÂCopy the note. You can past e the note to anot her date. Settings âÂÂModify the calendar settin gs. Go to to-do list âÂÂGo directly to yo ur to- do list. Send a calendar note 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar . 2. Highlight th e note you wish to send, and se lect Options > Send note > Send as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth to send the calendar note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, in a mult imedia message, or directly to another device. Receive a note in calendar format (vCal) When you receive a calendar note in calendar-to-calendar format (vCal), your phone displays Calendar note received . Select Show to view the calendar note. Select Save to sa ve the note t o your calendar or Options > Discard to discard the note. Modify calendar settings In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calendar > Options > Settings and one of the following: Set the date âÂÂEnter the current date, and select OK . Set the ti me âÂÂEnter the current time, and select OK . Time zone âÂÂSelect your current time zone. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 80 Fr iday, November 18, 20 05 11:54 AM
Organiser 81 Date format âÂÂSelect your preferred date format. Date separator âÂÂSelect your preferred date separator. Time format âÂÂSelect your preferred time format. Default view âÂÂSel ect a monthly or weekly view. Wee k s ta rt s âÂÂSelect the day the week starts. Auto-delete notes âÂÂSelect w hen to delete past notes. â Notes You can write text notes with the Notes . You can also send not es using text message, IR, or Bluetooth connectivity. Open notes In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes . You see your current list of notes. If there are no notes, select Ad d to create your first note. If there are existing notes, highlight a note, and select View . Make a note Initial note In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes > Ad d . Create yo ur note, and select Save . Additional notes In standby m ode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes > Options > Make a note . Create your note, and s elect Save . Create note options When you create a note, the following options are available: Insert time and date âÂÂAdd the time and date to your note. Close âÂÂReturn you to the notes list. Insert smiley âÂÂInsert a smiley into your message. Insert word or Edit word âÂÂEnter or edit the text of a new word that might not appear in the predi ctive text dictionary. Option only appears when predictive text is on. Insert symbol âÂÂInserts a special character into your m essage. O ption only appears when predictive text is on. Dictionary on or Dict ionary off âÂÂTurn predictive text on or off. Matches âÂÂView matches found in the predictive text dictionary for the word you want to use. T his displays only when predictive text is on. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 81 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 82 Send a note 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes . 2. Highlight the note you wish to send, and select Options > Send note > Send as mess age , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth to send the note in a text message, in a multimedia message, or directly to another device. Notes options In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Notes > Options and one of the following: Make a note âÂÂCreate a new note. Delete âÂÂDelete the note you se lected. Edit âÂÂEdit the note you selected. Use detail âÂÂUse a detail contained in the note. Send not e > Send as message , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend a note in a text message, in a multimedia message, or directly to another device. Delete all notes âÂÂDele te all notes. The note options appear only when you have created one or more notes. â T o-do list Use the To-do list feature to keep track of your tasks. You can save a task or errand as a to-do list note, s elect a priority level for the to-do list not e, and mark it as done when you have completed it. You can sort the to-do list notes by pri ority or by date. Open to-do list In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > To-do list . You see your current to-d o list. If there are no to-do tasks, select Add to create your first to-do l ist note. If there are existing to-do list notes, highlight a to-do list note, and select View . Make a to-do list note Initial to-do list note In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > To-do list > Ad d . En ter the subject, and select Save > High , Medium , or Low . Additional to-do list notes In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > To-do list > Options > Add . Ente r the subject, and select Save > High , Medium , or Low . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 82 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 83 Create to-do list note options When you create a to-do list note, the following options are available: Insert smiley âÂÂInsert a smile y into your message. Insert word or Edit word âÂÂEnter or edit the text of a new wo rd that might not appear in the predictive text dictionary. This displays only when predictive text is on. Insert symbol âÂÂIns ert a special character into your me ssage. This displays only when predictive text is on. Writing language âÂÂChoose the language you wa nt to use. Dictionary on or Dictionary off âÂÂTurn predictive text on or off. Matches âÂÂView matches found in the predictive text dictionary for the word you want to use. This displays only when predictive text is on. Edit to-do list notes In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > T o-do list > View > Edit . Edit the subject, select Save . View to-do list notes In standby m ode, select Menu > Organiser > T o-do list > View . Deadline âÂÂChange the deadline of the to-do list note. M a r k n o t e a s d o n e or Mark as not done âÂÂIndicate whether the to-do list note is completed or not. Delete âÂÂDelete the to-do list note. Use detail âÂÂUse a detail contained in the note. Edit priority âÂÂChange the priority to High , Medium , or Low . Send > Se nd as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend the to-do list note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, in a multim edia mes sage, or directly to another device. Go to calendar âÂÂLeave the to-do list, and go to the calendar. Save to calendar âÂÂSave the to- do list note to your ca lendar. Send a to-do list note 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > T o-do list . 2. Highlight the note you wish to send, and select Options > Send > Send as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth to send the to-do list note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 83 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Organiser 84 in a mul timedia message, or directly to another device. To-do list options In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > To-do list > Options and one of the following: Add âÂÂCreate a new to-do list note. Delete âÂÂDelete the to-do list note you selected. Mark note as done or Mark as not done âÂÂIndicate whether the to-do list note is completed or not. Use detail âÂÂUse a detail contained in the note. Sort by deadline or Sort by priority â Sort the to-do list by either date or priori ty. Send > Send as message , Via calendar , Via infrared , or Via Bluetooth âÂÂSend the to-do list note in calendar format (vCal), in a text message, in a multimedia message, or directly to another device. Go to calendar âÂÂLeave the to- do list, and go to the cale ndar. Save t o cal endar âÂÂSave the to-do list note you selected to your calendar. Delete done notes âÂÂDelete the t o-do list note you selected to your calendar. Delete all notes âÂÂDele te all to-do list notes. The to-do list options appear only when you have created one or more notes. â Calculator The calculator in your phone adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, calculates the square and the square root, changes the sign of the number entered, and converts currency values. Note: This calculat or has a limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. Use calculator 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calculator . 2. Enter the first number in the calculation. Press # for a decimal point if necessary. Press the scroll key up or down to change the sign of your number or value. Press * to cycle through the add ( ), subtract (-), multiply (*), and divide (/) characters. Pause briefly to select the displayed character. 3. Enter the second number in your calculation. 4. Select Equals . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 84 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
85 To perform a square or square root calculation, select Options > Square or Square root . Currency converter You can convert foreign currency to domestic, or vice versa, directly from standby mode or from the Calculator menu. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Calculator > Options > Exchange rate > Foreign units in domestic or Domestic unit s in foreign . Foreign units in domestic âÂÂThe number of home units it takes to make one unit of foreign currency. Domestic units in foreign âÂÂThe number of foreign units it takes to make one unit of your ho me currency. 2. Enter the exchange rate (press # to insert a decimal), and select OK . 3. Select Back to return to the Calculator screen, and ente r the currency amount to convert. 4. Select Options > In domestic or In foreign . In domestic âÂÂconverts forei gn currency to domestic currency. In foreign âÂÂconverts domestic currency to foreign currency. 5. If you have not alrea dy entered an exchange rate, the device prompts you to enter it. Select OK . You can edit the exchange rate at any time. â Countdown timer The countdown timer in your device enables you to enter a specific time (up to 99 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds). When the time runs out, your device sounds an alarm. The countdown timer only works when the phone is on. Once you turn off your phone, the timer is no longer active. Set the normal timer 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Countdo wn timer . 2. Enter the time (in hh:mm :ss format), and select OK . 3. Enter a note for the timer, and select St art . and the timer (in hh:mm:ss format) appear in standby mode when the countdown timer is running . When the time runs out, your phone sounds an alarm, vibrates, and flashes its lights. If you are in standby mode, select Restart or Exit . If you are not in 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 85 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
86 standby mode, press any key during the alarm to stop the timer. After 60 seconds the tim er alert expires automaticall y. Select Exit or press the end key to clear the timer note. Change the timer After you hav e set a timer, you c an change the time. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Countdo wn timer > Change time . 2. Enter the new time, and select OK . 3. Leave the note as it was, or enter a new note, and select Start . Stop the timer before the alarm sounds After you have set the timer, you can stop the timer. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Countdo wn timer > Stop timer . â Stopwatch Your phone has a stopwatch that can be used to track time . The stopwatc h displays time in hours, minutes, seconds, and fractions of a second in hh:mm:ss.s s format. Using the stopwatch or allowing it to run in the background when using other features increases the demand on battery power and reduces battery life. Measure split or lap time Use the split time or lap time functions for activities where you need to pace yourself. 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Stopwatch > Split timing or Lap timing > Start . Split timing âÂÂUse the split time function for such activities as a long distance race when you need to pace yourself. Select Split to note the lapsed time. The timer continues to run and the s plit time appears below the running time. Each time you select Split , the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. The maxi mum number of splits is 20. Lap timing âÂÂUse the lap time function when you want to track how long it takes to comp lete each cycle or lap. Select Lap to note the lap time. The clock stops, then immediately restarts from zero. The lap time appears below the running time. Each tim e you select Lap , the new measured time appears at the beginning of the list. The maxi mum number of laps is 20. 2. Select Stop to end timing and display total ti me. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 86 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
87 Save a time To save a time while the clock is running, select Stop > Save , enter a name for the measurement, and select OK . If you do not enter a name, the total time is used as the default title for the lap or split time. Stopwatch options In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Stop watch and one of the following: Continue âÂÂContinues to me asure time. Only appears if clock is running and you are returning to stopwatch screen. Show last time âÂÂView the last measured time. Split timing âÂÂUse the split time function. Lap timing âÂÂUse the lap time fu nction. View times âÂÂBrowse s aved times. Delete times > One by one or De lete all âÂÂDelete saved times. Operation note If you press the end key and return to standby mode, the clock continues to run in the background, and appears at the top of the screen. To return to the Stopwatch screen, do the following: 1. In standby mode, select Menu > Organiser > Stopwatch > Continue . 2. To stop the clock, select Stop . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 87 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Mobile web 88 12. Mobile web Mobile web is a network s ervice. See âÂÂNetwork ServicesâÂÂ, p. ix, for more information. Your phone has a built-in browser you can use to connect to selected services on the mobile Internet. If your wireless service provider or networ k operator supports this feature, you can view weather reports, check news or flight times, view financial information, and much more. The Web browser on your phone can display WAP-based content. Your device may ha ve some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you cho ose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as you would with any Internet site. If the security indicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data trans mission b etween th e device and the Internet gateway or server is encrypted. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Important: Use only services that you trust and th at offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. â Mobile Internet access Because mobile Internet content is designed to be viewed from your phone, your wireless provider is now your mobile Internet service provider as well. Your wireless provider has created a home page and set up your browser to go to this page when you log on to the mobile Internet. Once at your service providerâÂÂs home page, you may find links to a number of other sites. It should not be necessary to manually configure the browser on your phone. Normally this is done by your wireless provider when you subscribe to the feature. Contact your wireless provider if you have problems using the browser. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 88 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Mobile web 89 â Sign on to the mobile Internet In standby mode, select Menu > Mobile web . After a brief pause, your phone attempts to connect to your wireless providerâÂÂs home page. If you receive an error message, your phone may not be set up for browsing. Contact your wireless provider to make sure that your phone is configured properly. â Navigate the mobile Internet Since your phone screen is much smaller than a computer screen, mobile Internet content is displayed differently than you may be accustomed to seeing. Thi s section contains guidelines for using phone keys to navigate a WAP site. Phone keys ⢠To browse the WAP site, scroll up or down. ⢠Select a highlighted item. ⢠To enter text, press # to switch text input modes, and then press 0-9. ⢠To enter special characters, press *. Receive a call while online Depending on your wireless service provider or network operator, you may still be able to receive a voice call while using the WAP browser. ⢠To answer the incoming call, press the call key. ⢠To reject the incoming call, press the end key. After you end your voice call, the mobile Internet connection automatically resumes . If your wireless service provider or network operator does not support incoming calls while browsing, incoming calls are automatically forwarded to voice mail. Make an emergency call while online You can end your dat a connection and make an emergency call. 1. To close your mobile Internet connection, press the end key. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 3. Enter the emergency number for your present location (for example, 000, 111, or 911). Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 89 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Mobile web 90 Clear the cache and disconnect A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have ac cessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache while in the browser menu, select Navigate > Advanced > Clear. Highlight and s elect Cache > Clear. The cache also clears when you press and hold the end key to power off your device. To close your mobile Internet connection while browsing, press t he end key. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 90 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Extras 91 13. Extras â Games Select games In standby mode, select Menu > Extras > Games to display the game s on your device. Memory status You can view the memory available for game installations. In standby mode, select Men u > Extras > Games > Options > Memory status . â Collection Select application In standby mode, select Menu > Extras > Collection > Select application. Scroll to an application and select Open, or press the call key. An application may require a few seconds to load. When you open an application, wait for the launch screen to disappear. At that point, the application is ready. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Note: Only install applications from sources that offer adequate protection against harmful software. Memory sta tus You can view the memory available for application installa tions. in standby mode, select Menu > Extras > Collection > Op tions > Memory status . 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 91 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
PC connectivity 92 14. PC connectivity â PC data transfer You can transfer dat a, such as music, photos, and videos, from your device to a compatible PC or from a compatible PC to your device using Bluetooth connectivity. For more information, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 65. You can transfer dat a, such as music, photos, and videos, from your device to a compatible PC or from a compatible PC to your device using an IR connection. For more information, see âÂÂInfrared connectivityâÂÂ, p. 68. â Nokia PC Suite Nokia PC Suite software is available for this phone. Nokia PC Suite is a collection of powerful tools that you can use to manage y our phone features and data. Ea ch component is a separate program that includes online helps. Nokia PC Suite software, installation instructions, and other documentati on is provid ed free of cha rge and can be downloaded from the software downloads of the Nokia w eb site: www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite. Some of the features in your phone require network support. Contact your service provider for availability and configuration instructions. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 92 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Enhancements 93 15. Enhancements Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the AC-3 or AC-4 charger. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular mode l. The use of any other types may invalidate any approv al or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord A few practical rules about accessories and enhancements: ⢠Keep all accessories and enhancem ents ou t of the re ach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the co rd. ⢠Check regularly that enhancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠Installation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualified personnel only. Power ⢠Standard 1150 mAh Li-Ion Battery (BL-6C) ⢠Compact Charger (AC-3) ⢠Travel Charger (AC-4) ⢠Mobile Charger (DC-4) ⢠Charger Adapter (CA-44) Use the CA-44 charger adapter to connect the phone with Nokia chargers with a larger barrel size, including ACP-7, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, AC-1 (retractable charger), and LCH-12 (mobile charge r). USB data cable ⢠Connectivity Cable (CA-53) 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 93 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Enhanc ements 94 Handsfree ⢠Headrest Handsfree (BHF-3) ⢠CDMA Headrest Handsfree (BHF-4) ⢠Easy to Use Car Handsfree (HF-3) ⢠Advanced Plug-in Car Handsfree (HF-6) ⢠Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree (HF-6W) Headsets ⢠Mono Heads ets (HDB-4, HS-5, HS-6, HS-8, HS-9) ⢠Stereo Headsets (HDS-3, HS- 3, HS-23) ⢠Wireless Mono Headsets (HDW-3, HS-4W, HS-11W, HS-21W, HS-36W, HS -37W)) ⢠Wireless Image He adsets (HS-13W) ⢠Wireless Stereo Headse ts (HS-12W) Miscellaneous ⢠Induct ive Loops et (LPS-4 ) â¢T T Y A d a p t e r ( H D A - 1 0 ) ⢠Advanced Car Kit (CK-1W) ⢠Wireless Car Kit (CK-7W) ⢠Digital Pen (SU-1B) â¢A u d i o A d a p t e r ( A D - 1 5 ) ⢠Music Stand (MD-1) 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 94 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Reference information 95 16. Reference information This section provides information about your phone batteries, enhancem ents, c hargers, safety guidelines, and technical information. Be aware that the informat ion in this section is subject to change as batteries, chargers, and enhancements change. â Batteries and chargers Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger and then disconnect and reconnect it to start the charging . Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave fully charged battery connected to a cha rger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit th e battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (Thes e look like metal strips on the batt ery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 95 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Reference information 96 between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in t emperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispos e as household waste. â Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia batt ery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the packaging and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you ha ve any reason to believe that your battery is not an authen tic original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to th e nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistanc e. Your authorise d Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If auth enticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purch ase. Authenticate hologram 1. When looking at the hologram on the label, you shou ld see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. 3. Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for example, 1234567891987 6543210. Turn the battery so that the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 96 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Reference information 97 4. Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokiaoriginals.com/check. To create a text message enter th e 20-digit code, for example, 1234567891987 6543210, and send to 44 7786 200276. To create a text message, ⢠For countries in Asia Pacific, excluding India: En ter the 20 -digit code, for example, 1234567891987 6543210, and send to 61 427151515. ⢠For India only: Enter Battery followed by the 20-digit battery code, for example, Battery 1234567891987 6543210, and send to 5555. National and international operator charges will apply. You should receive a message indicating whether the code can be authenticated. If you need assist ance confirm ing the battery code, contact your local Nokia Care Ce ntres listed at www.nokia-asia.com/ carecent relocato r. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia ba ttery, please do not us e the battery. Take it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device . To find out more about original Nokia ba tteries, visit www.nokiaoriginals.com/battery. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 97 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Care and main tenance 98 17. Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the devi ce dry. Precipitation, humidity and all t ypes of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperat ures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake t he device. Rough handling c an break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes, before sending your device to a service facility. All of the above suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility for service. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 98 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Additional safety information 99 18. Additional safety information Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. â Operating environment Remember t o follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when us ed either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least xx centimeters (xx inches) away fro m the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain met al and you should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality co nnection to th e network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed unti l such a connection is availa ble. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the t ransmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic ma terials may be a ttracted to the device, and persons with a hearing aid should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. â Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospital s or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum sep aration of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consiste nt with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should: 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 99 Fr iday, November 1 8, 2005 11:54 AM
Additional safety information 100 ⢠Always keep the device more than 15.3 centimeters ( 6 inches) from the pacemaker; ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket; and ⢠Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device and move the device away. Hearing aids Some digital w ireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, c onsult your service provider. â Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (ant ilock) braking systems, el ectronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified person nel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device . Check regula rly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or e xplosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, o r enhancements. For vehicles equipped w ith an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in- vehicle wireless equipme nt is improperly installed and the air b ag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. â Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explos ive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially e xplosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily inju ry or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio eq uipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 100 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
Additional safety information 101 a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. â Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this phone, operate using radio signals, w ireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless phone for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the phone is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 3. Enter the offi cial emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your se rvice provider. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless phone may be the only means of communication a t the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so . â Certification information (SAR) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONA L GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guideline s and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific o rganisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Speci fic Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg)*. Tests for 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 101 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
Additional safety information 102 SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest ce rtified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power req uired to rea ch the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is xxx W/kg. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. Additional SA R information may be provided under product information at www.nokia-asia.com. * The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 W/kg averaged over 1 0 grams of body tissue. The guideline s incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions , please look under product information at www .nokia.com. â Battery information This section provides information about battery charging times with the Compact Charger (AC-3), the Travel Charger (AC-4), talk-times, and standby times. Be aware th at the information in this section is subject to change. For more information, contact your servic e provide r. Charging times The following charging times are approximate with the BL-6C 1150 mAh Li-Ion battery: Travel Charger (AC-4): up to 1 hour 45 minutes Compact Ch arger (AC-3): up to 3 h ours Talk and standby times Operation times are estimates only and depend on signal st rength, phone us e, network conditions, features used, battery age and condition (including charging habits), temperatures to which the battery is exposed, and many other factors. Talk time: 3 to 4 h ours (digital) Standby time: 8 to 12 days 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 102 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
103 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED W ARRANTY NOTE! This Limited Warranty is in addition to, and does not affect your legal (statutory) rights under your applicable national laws relating to the sale of consumer products. Nokia Corporation (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) provides this Limited Warranty to person who has purchased the Nokia product(s) included in the sales package (âÂÂProductâÂÂ). Nokia warrants to you that during the warranty period N okia or a Nokia authorised service company will in a commercially reasonable time remedy defects in materials, design an d workmanship free of charge by repairing or, should Nokia in its absolute discretion deem it necessary, replacing the Product in accordance with this Limited Warranty (unless otherwise required by law). This Limited Warranty is only valid and enforceable in the country where you have purchased the Product provided that it is intended for sale in that country. Warranty P eriod The warranty period starts at the time of Product's original purchase by the first end-user. The Product may consist of several different parts and different parts may be covered by a different warranty period (hereinafter âÂÂWarranty PeriodâÂÂ). The different W arranty Periods are: a) twelve (12) months for the mobile device and accessories (wheth er included in the mobile device sales package or sold separately) other than the consumable parts and accessories listed in (b) and (c) below; b) six (6) months for the following consumable parts and accessories: batteries, chargers, desk stands, headsets, cables and covers; and c) ninety (90) days for the media on which any softwar e is provided,e.g. CD-rom, memory card. As far as your national laws permit, the Warranty Period will not be extended or renewed or otherwise affected due to subsequent resale, repair or replacement of the Product. However, repaired part(s) will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period or for sixty (60) days from the date of repair , whichever is longer . How to get warranty service. If you wish to make a claim under the Limited Warranty , you may cal l the Nokia call center (where this is available and please note national rates apply to calls) and/or where necessary, return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location. Information about Nokia care centers, Nokia designated service locations and Nokia call centers can be foun d at local Nokia web pages where available. You must return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location before the expiry of the Warranty Period. When making a Limited Warranty claim you have to present: a) the Product (or affected part thereto), b) the legi ble and unmodified original proof of purchase, which clearly indicates th e name and address of the seller, the date and place of purchase, the product type and the IMEI or other serial number . This Limited Warranty extends only to the original first end-user of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end-user . What is not cover ed? 1. This Limited Warranty does not cover user manuals or any third party software, settings, content, data or links, whether included/downloaded in the Product, whether included during installment, assembly , shipping or at any other time in the delivery chain or otherwise and in any way acquired by you. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s), Nokia does not warrant that any Nokia software will meet your requirements, will work in combination with any hardware or software applications provided by a third party, that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error free or that any defects in the software are correctable or will be corrected. 2. This Limited Warranty does not cover a) normal wear and tear (including, without limitation, wear and tear of camera lenses, batteries or displays), b) transport costs, c) defects caused by rough handling (including, without limitation, defects caused by sharp items, by bending, compressing or dropping, etc.), d) defects or damage caused by misuse of the Product, including use that is contrary to the instructions provided by Nokia (e.g. as set out in the Product's user guide) and/or e) other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 103 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
104 3. Thi s Limited Warranty does not cover defects or alleged defects caused by the fact that the Product was used with, or connected to, a product, accessories, software and/or service not manufactured, supplied or authorised by Nokia or was used otherwise than for its intended use. Defects can be caused by viruses from your or from a third party's unauthorised access to services, other accounts, computer systems or networks. This unauthorised access can take place through hacking, password-mining or through a var iety of other means. 4. Thi s Limited Warranty does not cover defects caused by the fact that the battery has been short-circuited or by the fact that the seals of the battery enclosure or the cells are broken or show evidence of tampering or by the fact that the battery has been used in equipment other than those for which it has been specified. 5. Thi s Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been opened, modified or repaired by anyone other than an authorised service centre, if it is repaired using unauthorised spare parts or if the ProductâÂÂs serial number, the mobile accessory date code or the IMEI number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or are illegibl e in any way and this shall be determined in the sole discretion of Nokia. 6. Thi s Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been exposed to m oisture, to dampness or to extreme thermal or environmental conditions or to rapid changes in such conditions, to corrosion, to oxidation, to spillage of food or liquid or to influence from chem ical products. Other imp ortant not ices A third party, independent operator provides the SIM card and cellu lar and/or other network or system on which the Product operates. Therefore, Nokia will not accept responsibility under this warranty for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of the cellular or other network or system. Before the Product can be repaired or replaced, the operator may need to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock that may have been added to lock the product to a specific network or operator . Accordingly , Nokia does not accept responsibility for any delays in warranty repairs or for the inability of Nokia to complete warranty repairs that are caused by the operator's delay or failure to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock. Please remember to make back-up copies or keep written records of all important content and data stored in your Product, because content and data may be lost during repair or replacement of the Product. Nokia, in a manner consistent with the provisions of the section entitled âÂÂLim itation of Nokia's Liabilityâ below, to the extent permitted by applicable law(s), shall not under any circumstances be liable, either expressly or impliedly, for any damages or losses of any kind whatsoever resulting from loss of, damage to, or corruption of, content or data during repair or replacem ent of the Product. All parts of the Product or other equipment that Nokia has replaced shall become the property of Nokia. If the returned Product is found not to be covered by the term s and conditions of the Limited Warranty , Nokia and its authorised service companies reserve the right to charge a h andling fee. When repairing or replacing the Product, Nokia may use products or parts that are new, equivalent to new or re-conditioned. Your Product may contain country specific elements, including software. If the Product has been re-exported from its original destination country to another country , the Product may contain country specific elements that are not considered to be a defect under this Limited Warranty . Limitation of Nokia's liability This Limited Warranty is your sole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and Nokia's sole and exclusive liability in respect of defects in your Product. However , this Limited Warranty shall neither exclude nor limit i) any of your legal (statutory) rights under the applicable national laws or ii) any of your rights against the seller of the Product. This Limited Warranty replaces all other Nokia warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written, (non-mandatory) statutory , contractual, in tort or otherwise, including, w ithout limitation, and where permitted by applicable law, any implied conditions, warranties or other terms as to satisfa ctory quality or fitness for purpose. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s) Nokia does not assume any liability for loss of or damage to or corruption of data, for any loss of profit, loss of use of Products or functionality, loss of business, loss of contracts, loss of revenues or loss of anticipated savings, increased costs or expenses or for any indirect loss or damage, consequential loss or damage or special loss or damage. To the extent permitted by applicable law , NokiaâÂÂs liability shall be limited to the purchase value of the Produ ct. The above limitations shall not apply to death or person al injury resulting from NokiaâÂÂs proven negligence. 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 104 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
105 Statutory obligations This Limited Warranty must be read subject to any statutory provisions that imply war ranties or conditions into this Limited Warranty that cannot be excluded, restricted or modified or cannot be excluded, restricted or modified except to a limited extent. If such statutory provisions apply, to the extent to which Nokia is able to do so, its liability under those provisions will be limited, at its option to, in the case of goods: the replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods, the repair of the goods, the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods, or the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired; and in the case of services: the supplying of the services again or the payment of the cost of having the ser vices supplied again. NOTE! Your Product is a sophisticated electronic device. Nokia strongly encourages you to familiarise yourself with the user guide and instructions provided with and for the Product. Please also note that the Product might contain high precision displays, camera lenses and other such parts, which could be scratched or otherwise damaged if not handled very carefully . All warranty information, product features and specifications are subject to change without notice. Nokia Corporation Keilalahdentie 2-4 FIN-02 150 Espoo Finland 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 105 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
106 Index A About your device ix Active profile 55 Alarm c lock repeating 77 setting 77 tone 77 turn off 78 Allowed number if lock active 72 Analog service 75 Answer calls 10 slide open 60 Antenna 6 Anykey answer 59 Applications collection 91 settin gs 74 Authenticate hologram 96 Automat ic keyguard 62 redial 59 update of time and date 59 voice mail 29 B Back c over remove 6 replace 7 Backlight time-out 57 Banner 56 Battery 6 , 102 charge 7 charging times 102 remove, replace 7 talk and standby times 102 Bluetooth connectiv ity 65 receive data 68 set up 67 settin gs 67 Business cards 36 C Calendar 78 make notes 79 open 78 options 78 receive, send notes 80 settings 80 view 79 Call divert 76 duration 32 log, see logs 31 register, see logs 31 settings 59 summary 62 time 32 Caller groups 38 Calling cards 60 Calls answer 10 conference 10 duration 32 make 9 mute phone during 11 options during 11 restrictions 74 show times on display 62 silence 10 Camera changing options 44 photo sequence 43 recording videos 44 settings 45 take photos 42 use self-timer 43 Certification information (SAR) 101 Change lock code 73 Charger 71 , 95 connect 7 times 102 Clock settings, see time and date Conference calls 10 Confirmatio n tones 58 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 106 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
107 Contacts add 35 delete 41 edit 37 search 34 settings 38 view 34 Countdown time r 85 Currency converter 85 Custom profile 55 D Data call duration 32 calls 61 transfer 92 Date setti ngs, see ti me and date dialled 31 Dialled numbers 31 Dialling codes 35 Digital service 75 Display main menu 4 settings 56 Distribution lists 28 DTMF tones 63 E Emergency calls 89 , 101 End calls 10 slide closed 60 Enhancements 70 approved 93 Equaliser 53 ESN xi Extras 91 F Fax calls 32 , 61 Feature codes 75 File transfer 69 FM radio, see radio Folders, see gallery Font colour 56 G Gallery opening folders 47 options 48 Games 91 Go to functions 5 H Handsfree settings 71 Headset connect 8 settings 71 Hearing aid settings 71 Help get xi in-phone 4 text activation 4 , 64 I Indicators and icons 2 Infrared 68 International prefix 61 Internet, see wire less Internet K Keyguard automatic 62 lock and unlock 11 security 63 Keypad tones 57 L Language 62 Lap time 86 Listen to voice mail 29 Lock code change 73 preset 72 Logs clearing 32 dialled numbers 31 missed calls 31 received calls 31 Loopset settings 71 Loudspeaker 11 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 107 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
108 M Main menu display 4 Make calls 9 ManufacturerâÂÂs limited warranty 103 Memory card 63 checking status 63 phone 63 Messages minibrowser, see minibrowser messages multimedia, see multimedia messages text, see test messages voice, see voice messages Minib rowse r call duration 33 messages 30 MiniS D card 8 memory 63 Missed calls 31 Mobile web 88 Multimedia messages 21 create 22 , 24 delete 26 folders 22 read 23 reply 23 send 23 settin gs 27 Music playe r 49 Mute phone 11 My phone number, display 40 N Navigation key 62 Network approved for ix services ix , 75 settin gs 75 Network services ix No caller IDs 62 Nokia battery authentication guidelines 96 Nokia Care Contact Centre xi Nokia PC Suite 92 Nokia support and contact information xii Notes 81 make 81 open 81 options 82 send 82 O Organiser 77 P PC connectivity 92 Phone care and maintenance 98 details 76 keys and parts 1 language 62 lock 72 memory 63 set up your 6 Photographs 42 Play music tracks 49 radio 51 Predictive text 14 Profiles 55 Q Quick keys 2 R Radio options 52 play 51 Received calls 31 Recording sound 52 Repeating alarm 77 Restore factory settings 76 Ring tone for no caller ID 62 volume 57 Roaming options 75 S Safety information viii battery 102 explosive environments 100 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 108 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM
109 hearing aids 10 0 operating environment 99 pacemakers 99 vehicles 100 Screen saver 56 Scroll method 3 Security 4 keyguard 63 settings 72 Self-timer, camera 43 Sequence of photos 43 Set alarm 77 date 58 time 58 Set up speed dial 40 Settings 55 Shared memory x Show call time 62 Sleep mode 57 Slide answer calls 60 end calls 60 Snooze time-out 78 Speed dial 59 Split time 86 Standby mode 2 settings 56 Standby time 102 Start-up tone 64 Stopwatch 86 T Talk time 102 Text en try changing language 13 predictive 14 standard 13 Text messages create 17 delete 20 folders 16 read 18 reply 18 send 17 settings 20 templates 18 Theme 57 Time and date 58 Timed profiles 55 To-do list edit 83 make 82 open 82 options 84 send 83 view 83 Tones 57 DTMF 63 start-up 64 Transfer files 69 Turn phone on or off 8 V Vibrating alert 57 Videos 44 Voice commands 64 privacy 74 recorder 52 Voice messages automate 29 listen 29 mailbox number 29 setting up mailbox 29 Voice tags assign 39 delete 40 modify 39 use 39 Volume 10 W Wallpaper 56 Warning tones 58 Wireless Internet access 88 clear cache 90 disconnect 90 make emergency call while online 89 receive call while online 89 sign on 89 9244299_6265_en_au_oth.fm Page 109 Friday, November 18, 2005 11:54 AM